Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release...
Transcript of Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release...
![Page 1: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
—RELION® 615 SERIES
Line Differential Protection andControlRED615Application Manual
![Page 2: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
![Page 3: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
Document ID: 1MRS756498Issued: 2018-12-20
Revision: NProduct version: 5.0 FP1
© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved
![Page 4: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license andmay be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
TrademarksABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand orproduct names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registeredtrademarks of their respective holders.
WarrantyPlease inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
www.abb.com/relion
![Page 5: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept orproduct description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual mustsatisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, includingthat any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. Inparticular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failurewould create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited topersonal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entityapplying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure thatall measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This product has been designed to be connected and communicate data andinformation via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network.It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for networkadministration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessarymeasures (such as, but not limited to, installation of firewalls, application ofauthentication measures, encryption of data, installation of anti virus programs, etc.)to protect the product and the network, its system and interface included, against anykind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, leakage and/ortheft of data or information. ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot becompletely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested tonotify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in noevent shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the useof this manual or the application of the equipment.
![Page 6: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communitieson the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagneticcompatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment foruse within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). Thisconformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the productstandard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed inaccordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
![Page 7: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................5This manual........................................................................................ 5Intended audience.............................................................................. 5Product documentation.......................................................................6
Product documentation set............................................................6Document revision history............................................................. 6Related documentation..................................................................7
Symbols and conventions...................................................................7Symbols.........................................................................................7Document conventions..................................................................8Functions, codes and symbols...................................................... 9
Section 2 RED615 overview...........................................................15Overview...........................................................................................15
Product version history................................................................16PCM600 and relay connectivity package version........................17
Operation functionality......................................................................17Optional functions........................................................................17
Physical hardware............................................................................ 18Local HMI......................................................................................... 20
Display.........................................................................................21LEDs............................................................................................22Keypad........................................................................................ 22
Web HMI...........................................................................................22Authorization.....................................................................................24
Audit trail......................................................................................24Communication.................................................................................26
Self-healing Ethernet ring............................................................27Ethernet redundancy................................................................... 28Process bus.................................................................................30Secure communication................................................................32Protection communication and supervision.................................32
Section 3 RED615 standard configurations................................... 35Standard configurations....................................................................35
Addition of control functions for primary devices and the useof binary inputs and outputs........................................................ 37
Connection diagrams........................................................................39Standard configuration A.................................................................. 43
Applications................................................................................. 43
Table of contents
RED615 1Application Manual
![Page 8: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Functions.....................................................................................44Default I/O connections.......................................................... 44Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................46
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 47Functional diagrams for protection ........................................ 47Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................51Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................52Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................54Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 56Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 57Functional diagrams for other timer logics ............................ 60Other functions ...................................................................... 61
Standard configuration B.................................................................. 61Applications................................................................................. 61Functions.....................................................................................62
Default I/O connections.......................................................... 62Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................64
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 66Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 66Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................76Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.........................77Functional diagrams for control and interlocking....................80Functional diagrams for measurement functions................... 83Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs......................... 84Functional diagrams for other timer logics............................. 87Other functions ...................................................................... 88
Standard configuration C..................................................................88Applications................................................................................. 88Functions.....................................................................................89
Default I/O connections.......................................................... 89Default disturbance recorder settings.....................................91
Functional diagrams.................................................................... 92Functional diagrams for protection......................................... 93Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder........................99Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................100Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................103Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 106Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 107Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 110Other functions .................................................................... 111
Standard configuration D................................................................111Applications............................................................................... 111Functions...................................................................................112
Table of contents
2 RED615Application Manual
![Page 9: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
Default I/O connections........................................................ 113Default disturbance recorder settings...................................114
Functional diagrams.................................................................. 116Functional diagrams for protection ...................................... 117Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................128Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................129Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................132Functional diagrams for measurement functions ................ 135Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs....................... 137Functional diagrams for other timer logics........................... 140Other functions .................................................................... 141
Standard configuration E................................................................ 141Applications............................................................................... 141Functions...................................................................................143
Default I/O connections........................................................ 143Default disturbance recorder settings...................................145
Functional diagrams.................................................................. 147Functional diagrams for protection....................................... 148Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder......................158Functional diagrams for condition monitoring.......................159Functional diagrams for control and interlocking..................162Functional diagrams for measurement functions................. 165Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs ...................... 167Other functions .................................................................... 170
Section 4 Requirements for measurement transformers..............171Current transformers...................................................................... 171
Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection.... 171Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limitfactor.................................................................................... 171Non-directional overcurrent protection................................. 172Example for non-directional overcurrent protection..............173
Section 5 Protection relay's physical connections........................175Inputs..............................................................................................175
Energizing inputs.......................................................................175Phase currents..................................................................... 175Residual current................................................................... 175Phase voltages.....................................................................175Residual voltage...................................................................176Sensor inputs....................................................................... 176
Auxiliary supply voltage input.................................................... 176Binary inputs..............................................................................176RTD/mA inputs.......................................................................... 178
Table of contents
RED615 3Application Manual
![Page 10: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Outputs........................................................................................... 179Outputs for tripping and controlling............................................179Outputs for signalling.................................................................179IRF.............................................................................................181
Protection communication options..................................................181
Section 6 Glossary....................................................................... 183
Table of contents
4 RED615Application Manual
![Page 11: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manual
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelinessorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose atypical protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when calculatingsettings.
1.2 Intended audience
This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning,pre-engineering and engineering.
The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical powerengineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemesand principles.
1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction
RED615 5Application Manual
![Page 12: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
1.3 Product documentation
1.3.1 Product documentation set
Pla
nnin
g &
pu
rcha
se
Eng
inee
ring
Inst
alla
tion
Com
mis
sion
ing
Ope
ratio
n
Mai
nten
ance
Dec
omm
issi
onin
g,
dein
stal
latio
n &
dis
posa
l
Quick start guideQuick installation guideBrochureProduct guideOperation manualInstallation manualConnection diagramEngineering manualTechnical manualApplication manualCommunication protocol manualIEC 61850 engineering guidePoint list manualCyber security deployment guideline
GUID-12DC16B2-2DC1-48DF-8734-0C8B7116124C V2 EN
Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle
Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloadedfrom the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion.
1.3.2 Document revision historyDocument revision/date Product version HistoryA/2008-10-03 1.1 First release
B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version
C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version
D/2010-06-29 3.0 Terminology updated
E/2010-09-24 3.0 Content updated
F/2012-05-11 4.0 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version
G/2013-02-21 4.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version
Table continues on next page
Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction
6 RED615Application Manual
![Page 13: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
Document revision/date Product version HistoryH/2013-12-20 5.0 Content updated to correspond to the
product version
K/2014-01-24 5.0 Content updated
L/2015-10-30 5.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to theproduct version
M/2016-05-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated
N/2018-12-20 5.0 FP1 Content updated
Download the latest documents from the ABB Web sitehttp://www.abb.com/relion.
1.3.3 Related documentationName of the document Document IDModbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756468
DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756709
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS756710
IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS756475
Engineering Manual 1MRS757121
Installation Manual 1MRS756375
Operation Manual 1MRS756708
Technical Manual 1MRS756887
Cyber Security Deployment Guideline 1MRS758280
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard whichcould result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in personal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning relatedto the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of
1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction
RED615 7Application Manual
![Page 14: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage toequipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts andconditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design yourproject or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understandthat under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may resultin degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2 Document conventions
A particular convention may not be used in this manual.
• Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary alsocontains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using thepush button icons.To navigate between the options, use and .
• Menu paths are presented in bold.Select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Parameter values are indicated with quotation marks.The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off".
• Input/output messages and monitored data names are shown in Courier font.When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE.
• This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced".
Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction
8 RED615Application Manual
![Page 15: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbolsTable 1: Functions included in the relay
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIProtection
Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, low stage
PHLPTOC1 3I> (1) 51P-1 (1)
Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, high stage
PHHPTOC1 3I>> (1) 51P-2 (1)
PHHPTOC2 3I>> (2) 51P-2 (2)
Three-phase non-directional overcurrentprotection, instantaneous stage
PHIPTOC1 3I>>> (1) 50P/51P (1)
Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, low stage
DPHLPDOC1 3I> -> (1) 67-1 (1)
DPHLPDOC2 3I> -> (2) 67-1 (2)
Three-phase directional overcurrentprotection, high stage
DPHHPDOC1 3I>> -> (1) 67-2 (1)
Non-directional earth-fault protection, lowstage
EFLPTOC1 Io> (1) 51N-1 (1)
EFLPTOC2 Io> (2) 51N-1 (2)
Non-directional earth-fault protection,high stage
EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
Non-directional earth-fault protection,instantaneous stage
EFIPTOC1 Io>>> (1) 50N/51N (1)
Directional earth-fault protection, lowstage
DEFLPDEF1 Io> -> (1) 67N-1 (1)
DEFLPDEF2 Io> -> (2) 67N-1 (2)
Directional earth-fault protection, highstage
DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67N-2 (1)
Admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1)
EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2)
EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1)
WPWDE2 Po> -> (2) 32N (2)
WPWDE3 Po> -> (3) 32N (3)
Transient/intermittent earth-faultprotection
INTRPTEF1 Io> -> IEF (1) 67NIEF (1)
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC1 Io>HA (1) 51NHA (1)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io
EFHPTOC1 Io>> (1) 51N-2 (1)
Negative-sequence overcurrentprotection
NSPTOC1 I2> (1) 46 (1)
NSPTOC2 I2> (2) 46 (2)
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2/I1> (1) 46PD (1)
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo> (1) 59G (1)
ROVPTOV2 Uo> (2) 59G (2)
ROVPTOV3 Uo> (3) 59G (3)
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction
RED615 9Application Manual
![Page 16: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIThree-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U< (1) 27 (1)
PHPTUV2 3U< (2) 27 (2)
PHPTUV3 3U< (3) 27 (3)
Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV1 3U> (1) 59 (1)
PHPTOV2 3U> (2) 59 (2)
PHPTOV3 3U> (3) 59 (3)
Positive-sequence undervoltageprotection
PSPTUV1 U1< (1) 47U+ (1)
Negative-sequence overvoltageprotection
NSPTOV1 U2> (1) 47O- (1)
Frequency protection FRPFRQ1 f>/f<,df/dt (1) 81 (1)
FRPFRQ2 f>/f<,df/dt (2) 81 (2)
FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3)
FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81 (4)
Three-phase thermal protection forfeeders, cables and distributiontransformers
T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F (1)
Three-phase thermal overload protection,two time constants
T2PTTR1 3Ith>T/G/C (1) 49T/G/C (1)
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 BST (1) BST (1)
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 51BF/51NBF (1)
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f> (1) 68 (1)
Switch onto fault CBPSOF1 SOTF (1) SOTF (1)
Master trip TRPPTRC1 Master Trip (1) 94/86 (1)
TRPPTRC2 Master Trip (2) 94/86 (2)
Table continues on next page
Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction
10 RED615Application Manual
![Page 17: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSIMultipurpose protection MAPGAPC1 MAP (1) MAP (1)
MAPGAPC2 MAP (2) MAP (2)
MAPGAPC3 MAP (3) MAP (3)
MAPGAPC4 MAP (4) MAP (4)
MAPGAPC5 MAP (5) MAP (5)
MAPGAPC6 MAP (6) MAP (6)
MAPGAPC7 MAP (7) MAP (7)
MAPGAPC8 MAP (8) MAP (8)
MAPGAPC9 MAP (9) MAP (9)
MAPGAPC10 MAP (10) MAP (10)
MAPGAPC11 MAP (11) MAP (11)
MAPGAPC12 MAP (12) MAP (12)
MAPGAPC13 MAP (13) MAP (13)
MAPGAPC14 MAP (14) MAP (14)
MAPGAPC15 MAP (15) MAP (15)
MAPGAPC16 MAP (16) MAP (16)
MAPGAPC17 MAP (17) MAP (17)
MAPGAPC18 MAP (18) MAP (18)
Fault locator SCEFRFLO1 FLOC (1) 21FL (1)
Line differential protection with in-zonepower transformer
LNPLDF1 3Id/I> (1) 87L (1)
High-impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF (1) HIZ (1)
Power quality
Current total demand distortion CMHAI1 PQM3I (1) PQM3I (1)
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI1 PQM3U (1) PQM3V (1)
Voltage variation PHQVVR1 PQMU (1) PQMV (1)
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB1 PQUUB (1) PQVUB (1)
Control
Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR1 I <-> O CB (1) I <-> O CB (1)
Disconnector control DCXSWI1 I <-> O DCC (1) I <-> O DCC (1)
DCXSWI2 I <-> O DCC (2) I <-> O DCC (2)
Earthing switch control ESXSWI1 I <-> O ESC (1) I <-> O ESC (1)
Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI1 I <-> O DC (1) I <-> O DC (1)
DCSXSWI2 I <-> O DC (2) I <-> O DC (2)
DCSXSWI3 I <-> O DC (3) I <-> O DC (3)
Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1)
ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2)
Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 (1)
Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 (1)
Condition monitoring and supervision
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction
RED615 11Application Manual
![Page 18: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSICircuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM (1) CBCM (1)
Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM (1)
TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM (2)
Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I (1) MCS 3I (1)
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 FUSEF (1) 60 (1)
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 PCS (1) PCS (1)
Runtime counter for machines anddevices
MDSOPT1 OPTS (1) OPTM (1)
Measurement
Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR (1) DFR (1)
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LOADPROF (1)
Fault record FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC (1) FAULTREC (1)
Three-phase current measurement CMMXU1 3I (1) 3I (1)
Sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 (1)
Residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 Io (1) In (1)
Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU1 3U (1) 3V (1)
VMMXU2 3U (2) 3V (2)
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 Uo (1) Vn (1)
Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 (1)
Three-phase power and energymeasurement
PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E (1)
RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 X130 (RTD) (1) X130 (RTD) (1)
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 f (1) f (1)
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending SMVSENDER SMVSENDER SMVSENDER
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled valuereceiving (voltage sharing)
SMVRCV SMVRCV SMVRCV
Other
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC1 TP (1) TP (1)
TPGAPC2 TP (2) TP (2)
TPGAPC3 TP (3) TP (3)
TPGAPC4 TP (4) TP (4)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, secondresolution)
TPSGAPC1 TPS (1) TPS (1)
Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minuteresolution)
TPMGAPC1 TPM (1) TPM (1)
Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC1 PT (1) PT (1)
PTGAPC2 PT (2) PT (2)
Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF (1)
TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) TOF (2)
TOFGAPC3 TOF (3) TOF (3)
TOFGAPC4 TOF (4) TOF (4)
Table continues on next page
Section 1 1MRS756498 NIntroduction
12 RED615Application Manual
![Page 19: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 IEC-ANSITime delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) TON (1)
TONGAPC2 TON (2) TON (2)
TONGAPC3 TON (3) TON (3)
TONGAPC4 TON (4) TON (4)
Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC1 SR (1) SR (1)
SRGAPC2 SR (2) SR (2)
SRGAPC3 SR (3) SR (3)
SRGAPC4 SR (4) SR (4)
Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC1 MV (1) MV (1)
MVGAPC2 MV (2) MV (2)
Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC1 SPC (1) SPC (1)
SPCGAPC2 SPC (2) SPC (2)
Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4 (1)
SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2) SCA4 (2)
SCA4GAPC3 SCA4 (3) SCA4 (3)
SCA4GAPC4 SCA4 (4) SCA4 (4)
Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4 (1)
1MRS756498 N Section 1Introduction
RED615 13Application Manual
![Page 20: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
14
![Page 21: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
Section 2 RED615 overview
2.1 Overview
RED615 is a phase-segregated two-end line differential protection and control relaydesigned for utility and industrial power systems, including radial, looped and mesheddistribution networks with or without distributed power generation. RED615 is alsodesigned for the protection of line differential applications with a transformer withinthe protection zone. RED615 relays communicate between substations over a fiberoptic link or a galvanic pilot wire connection. RED615 is a member of ABB’s Relion®
product family and part of its 615 protection and control product series. The 615 seriesrelays are characterized by their compactness and withdrawable-unit design. Re-engineered from the ground up, the 615 series has been guided by the IEC 61850standard for communication and interoperability of substation automation equipment.
The relay provides unit type main protection for overhead lines and cable feeders indistribution networks. The relay also features current-based protection functions forremote back-up for down-stream protection relays and local back-up for the linedifferential main protection. Further, standard configurations B and C also includeearth-fault protection. Standard configurations D and E include directionalovercurrent and voltage based protection functions.
The relay is adapted for the protection of overhead line and cable feeders in isolatedneutral, resistance earthed, compensated (impedance earthed) and solidly earthednetworks. Once the relay has been given the application-specific settings, it candirectly be put into service.
The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC61850 with Edition 2 support, process bus according to IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1 communication protocol issupported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 15Application Manual
![Page 22: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
2.1.1 Product version historyProduct version Product history1.1 Product released
2.0 • Support for DNP3 serial or TCP/IP• Support for IEC 60870-5-103• New standard configurations B and C• Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI
3.0 • Additions to configuration B• Application configurability support• Analog GOOSE support• Large display with single line diagram• Enhanced mechanical design• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records• Admittance-based earth-fault protection• Residual overvoltage protection• Low voltage power supply option• Pilot wire modem support
4.0 • Additions/changes for configurations A-C• Dual fiber-optic Ethernet communication option (COM0032)• Generic control point (SPCGGIO) function blocks• Additional logic blocks• Button object for SLD• Controllable disconnector and earth switch objects for SLD• Wattmetric based E/F• Harmonics based E/F• Increased maximum amount of events and fault records
4.0 FP1 • Parallel use of IEC 61850 and DNP3 protocols• Parallel use of IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols• Two selectable indication colors for LEDs (red or green)• Online binary signal monitoring with PCM600
5.0 • New configurations D and E• New layout in Application Configuration tool for all configurations• In-zone transformer application support• Fault locator• Load profile recorder• Optional RTD/mA inputs• Profibus adapter support• Support for multiple SLD pages• Import/export of settings via WHMI• Setting usability improvements• HMI event filtering tool
5.0 FP1 • IEC 61850 Edition 2• Currents sending support with IEC 61850-9-2 LE• Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850-9-2 LE• High-availability seamless redundancy (HSR) protocol• Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP-1)• Support for configuration migration (starting from Ver.3.0 to Ver.5.0 FP1)• Software closable Ethernet ports• Chinese language support• Report summary via WHMI• Voltage unbalance power quality option• Switch onto fault• Additional timer, set-reset and analog value scaling functions
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
16 RED615Application Manual
![Page 23: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
2.1.2 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version
• Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600 2.6 (Rollup 20150626) or later• RED615 Connectivity Package Ver.5.1 or later
• Parameter Setting• Signal Monitoring• Event Viewer• Disturbance Handling• Application Configuration• Signal Matrix• Graphical Display Editor• Communication Management• IED User Management• IED Compare• Firmware Update• Fault Record tool• Load Record Profile• Lifecycle Traceability• Configuration Wizard• AR Sequence Visualizer• Label Printing• IEC 61850 Configuration• IED Configuration Migration• Differential Characteristics Tool
Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web sitehttp://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with UpdateManager in PCM600.
2.2 Operation functionality
2.2.1 Optional functions
• Autoreclosing (configurations B, C, D and E only)• Modbus TCP/IP or RTU/ASCII• IEC 60870-5-103• DNP3 TCP/IP or serial• Admittance-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)• Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, D and E only)• Harmonics-based earth-fault protection (configurations B, C, D and E only)• Power quality functions (configurations D and E only)• Fault locator (configurations D and E only)
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 17Application Manual
![Page 24: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
• RTD/mA measurement (configuration D only)• IEC 61850-9-2 LE (configurations D and E only, with 2 × LC only)• IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization (with 2 × LC only)
2.3 Physical hardware
The protection relay consists of two main parts: plug-in unit and case. The contentdepends on the ordered functionality.
Table 2: Plug-in unit and case
Main Slot ID Content optionsPlug-in
unit- HMI Small (5 lines, 20 characters)
Large (10 lines, 20 characters) with SLD
Small Chinese (3 lines, 8 or more characters)Large Chinese (7 lines, 8 or more characters) withSLD
X100 Auxiliary power/BOmodule
48...250 V DC/100...240 V AC; or 24...60 V DC2 normally-open PO contacts1 change-over SO contacts1 normally open SO contact2 double-pole PO contacts with TCS1 dedicated internal fault output contact
X110 BIO module 8 binary inputs4 SO contacts
X120 AI/BI module Only with configuration B:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)3 binary inputs
Only with configurations A, C and D:3 phase current inputs (1/5 A)1 residual current input (1/5 A or 0.2/1 A)1)
4 binary inputs
Table continues on next page
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
18 RED615Application Manual
![Page 25: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
Main Slot ID Content optionsCase X130 AI/BI module Only with configuration D:
3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)4 binary inputs
AI/RTD/mA module Only with configuration D:3 phase voltage inputs (60...210 V)1 residual voltage input (60...210 V)1 generic mA input2 RTD sensor inputs
Sensor input module Only with configuration E:3 combi sensor inputs (three-phase current andvoltage)1 residual current input (0.2/1 A)1)
Optional BIO module Optional for configurations A, B and C:6 binary inputs3 SO contacts
X000 Communication module See the technical manual for details about differenttypes of communication modules.
1) The 0.2/1 A input is normally used in applications requiring sensitive earth-fault protection and featuringcore-balance current transformers.
Rated values of the current and voltage inputs are basic setting parameters of theprotection relay. The binary input thresholds are selectable within the range 16…176V DC by adjusting the binary input setting parameters.
See the installation manual for more information about the case andthe plug-in unit.
The connection diagrams of different hardware modules are presented in this manual.
Table 3: Input/output overview
Std.conf.
Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi
sensorBI BO RTD mA
A ACAD 4 - - 12 4 PO
+ 6 SO- -
AF 4 - - 18 4 PO+ 9 SO
- -
B AA / ABAC 4 1 - 11 4 PO
+ 6 SO- -
AE 4 1 - 17 4 PO+ 9 SO
- -
C ACAD 4 - - 12 4 PO
+ 6 SO- -
AF 4 - - 18 4 PO+ 9 SO
- -
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 19Application Manual
![Page 26: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Std.conf.
Order code digit Analog channels Binary channels 5-6 7-8 CT VT Combi
sensorBI BO RTD mA
DFE / FF AD 4 5 - 12 4 PO
+ 6 SO2 1
AE / AF AG 4 5 - 16 4 PO+ 6 SO
- -
E DA AH 1 - 3 8 4 PO+ 6 SO
- -
2.4 Local HMI
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. TheLHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
REF615
Overcurrent
Dir. earth-fault
Voltage protection
Phase unbalance
Thermal overload
Breaker failure
Disturb. rec. Triggered
CB condition monitoring
Supervision
Arc detected
Autoreclose shot in progr.
A070704 V4 EN
Figure 2: Example of the LHMI
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
20 RED615Application Manual
![Page 27: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
2.4.1 Display
The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports two character sizes. Thecharacter size depends on the selected language. The amount of characters and rowsfitting the view depends on the character size.
Table 4: Small display
Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row
Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 5 20
Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 3 8 or more
1) Depending on the selected language
Table 5: Large display
Character size1) Rows in the view Characters per row
Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) 10 20
Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 7 8 or more
1) Depending on the selected language
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
1 2
3 4A070705 V3 EN
Figure 3: Display layout
1 Header
2 Icon
3 Content
4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed)
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 21Application Manual
![Page 28: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
2.4.2 LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Ready, Start andTrip.
There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the LHMI. The LEDs can beconfigured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI,WHMI or PCM600.
2.4.3 Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push buttons which are used to navigate in different viewsor menus. With the push buttons you can give open or close commands to objects inthe primary circuit, for example, a circuit breaker, a contactor or a disconnector. Thepush buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help andswitch between local and remote control mode.
A071176 V1 EN
Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command pushbuttons and RJ-45 communication port
2.5 Web HMI
The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser. When theSecure Communication parameter in the protection relay is activated, the Web serveris forced to take a secured (HTTPS) connection to WHMI using TLS encryption.TheWHMI is verified with Internet Explorer 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 and 11.0.
WHMI is disabled by default.
WHMI offers several functions.
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
22 RED615Application Manual
![Page 29: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
• Programmable LEDs and event lists• System supervision• Parameter settings• Measurement display• Disturbance records• Fault records• Load profile record• Phasor diagram• Single-line diagram• Importing/Exporting parameters• Report summary
The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI.
A070754 V6 EN
Figure 5: Example view of the WHMI
The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely.
• Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the frontcommunication port.
• Remotely over LAN/WAN.
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 23Application Manual
![Page 30: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
2.6 Authorization
Four user categories have been predefined for the LHMI and the WHMI, each withdifferent rights and default passwords.
The default passwords in the protection relay delivered from the factory can bechanged with Administrator user rights.
User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI alwaysuses authorization.
Table 6: Predefined user categories
Username User rightsVIEWER Read only access
OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally)• Changing setting groups• Controlling• Clearing indications
ENGINEER • Changing settings• Clearing event list• Clearing disturbance records• Changing system settings such as IP address, serial baud rate or
disturbance recorder settings• Setting the protection relay to test mode• Selecting language
ADMINISTRATOR • All listed above• Changing password• Factory default activation
For user authorization for PCM600, see PCM600 documentation.
2.6.1 Audit trail
The protection relay offers a large set of event-logging functions. Critical system andprotection relay security-related events are logged to a separate nonvolatile audit trailfor the administrator.
Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the reconstructionand examination of the sequence of system and security-related events and changes inthe protection relay. Both audit trail events and process related events can beexamined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help of Event List in LHMIand WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600.
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
24 RED615Application Manual
![Page 31: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
The protection relay stores 2048 audit trail events to the nonvolatile audit trail.Additionally, 1024 process events are stored in a nonvolatile event list. Both the audittrail and event list work according to the FIFO principle. Nonvolatile memory is basedon a memory type which does not need battery backup nor regular component changeto maintain the memory storage.
Audit trail events related to user authorization (login, logout, violation remote andviolation local) are defined according to the selected set of requirements from IEEE1686. The logging is based on predefined user names or user categories. The user audittrail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI.
Table 7: Audit trail events
Audit trail event DescriptionConfiguration change Configuration files changed
Firmware change Firmware changed
Firmware change fail Firmware change failed
Attached to retrofit test case Unit has been attached to retrofit case
Removed from retrofit test case Removed from retrofit test case
Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely
Setting group local User changed setting group locally
Control remote DPC object control remote
Control local DPC object control local
Test on Test mode on
Test off Test mode off
Reset trips Reset latched trips (TRPPTRC*)
Setting commit Settings have been changed
Time change Time changed directly by the user. Note that this is not usedwhen the protection relay is synchronised properly by theappropriate protocol (SNTP, IRIG-B, IEEE 1588 v2).
View audit log Administrator accessed audit trail
Login Successful login from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP orLHMI.
Logout Successful logout from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS), WHMI, FTP orLHMI.
Password change Password changed
Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool
Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period
Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),WHMI, FTP or LHMI.
Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS),WHMI, FTP or LHMI.
PCM600 Event Viewer can be used to view the audit trail events and process relatedevents. Audit trail events are visible through dedicated Security events view. Sinceonly the administrator has the right to read audit trail, authorization must be used in
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 25Application Manual
![Page 32: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
PCM600. The audit trail cannot be reset, but PCM600 Event Viewer can filter data.Audit trail events can be configured to be visible also in LHMI/WHMI Event listtogether with process related events.
To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define theAuthority logging level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/Security. This exposes audit trail events to all users.
Table 8: Comparison of authority logging levels
Audit trail event Authority logging level
NoneConfiguration change
Settinggroup
Settinggroup,control
Settingsedit
All
Configuration change ● ● ● ● ●
Firmware change ● ● ● ● ●
Firmware change fail ● ● ● ● ●
Attached to retrofit testcase
● ● ● ● ●
Removed from retrofittest case
● ● ● ● ●
Setting group remote ● ● ● ●
Setting group local ● ● ● ●
Control remote ● ● ●
Control local ● ● ●
Test on ● ● ●
Test off ● ● ●
Reset trips ● ● ●
Setting commit ● ●
Time change ●
View audit log ●
Login ●
Logout ●
Password change ●
Firmware reset ●
Violation local ●
Violation remote ●
2.7 Communication
The protection relay supports a range of communication protocols including IEC61850, IEC 61850-9-2 LE, IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® and DNP3. Profibus DPV1
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
26 RED615Application Manual
![Page 33: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
communication protocol is supported by using the protocol converter SPA-ZC 302.Operational information and controls are available through these protocols. However,some communication functionality, for example, horizontal communication betweenthe protection relays, is only enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and controlfunctions. Additionally, parameter settings, disturbance recordings and fault recordscan be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol. Disturbance recordings are availableto any Ethernet-based application in the IEC 60255-24 standard COMTRADE fileformat. The protection relay can send and receive binary signals from other devices(so-called horizontal communication) using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile,where the highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms issupported. Furthermore, the protection relay supports sending and receiving of analogvalues using GOOSE messaging. The protection relay meets the GOOSEperformance requirements for tripping applications in distribution substations, asdefined by the IEC 61850 standard.
The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves oneclient connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850and Modbus.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed onintegrated optional communication modules. The protection relay can be connected toEthernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-TX) or thefiber-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). An optional serial interface is available forRS-232/RS-485 communication.
2.7.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring
For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the externalswitches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in theswitches. Otherwise, connecting the loop topology can cause problems to thenetwork. The protection relay itself does not support link-down detection or RSTP.The ring recovery process is based on the aging of the MAC addresses, and the link-up/link-down events can cause temporary breaks in communication. For a betterperformance of the self-healing loop, it is recommended that the external switchfurthest from the protection relay loop is assigned as the root switch (bridge priority= 0) and the bridge priority increases towards the protection relay loop. The end linksof the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external switch or to twoadjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communicationmodule with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays.
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 27Application Manual
![Page 34: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Managed Ethernet switchwith RSTP support
Managed Ethernet switchwith RSTP support
Client BClient A
Network ANetwork B
GUID-283597AF-9F38-4FC7-B87A-73BFDA272D0F V3 EN
Figure 6: Self-healing Ethernet ring solution
The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30protection relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to beconnected, it is recommended that the network is split into severalrings with no more than 30 protection relays per ring. Each protectionrelay has a 50-μs store-and-forward delay, and to fulfil theperformance requirements for fast horizontal communication, thering size is limited to 30 protection relays.
2.7.2 Ethernet redundancy
IEC 61850 specifies a network redundancy scheme that improves the systemavailability for substation communication. It is based on two complementaryprotocols defined in the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocolPRP and high-availability seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely onthe duplication of all transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one logicalnetwork connection. Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a link orswitch with a zero-switchover time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-timerequirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and timesynchronization.
PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks.HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-effective redundancy. Thus, each device incorporates a switch element that forwardsframes from port to port. The HSR/PRP option is available for all 615 series protectionrelays. However, RED615 supports this option only over fiber optics.
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
28 RED615Application Manual
![Page 35: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
IEC 62439-3:2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in2010. These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439-3Edition 1 and IEC 62439-3 Edition 2. The protection relay supportsIEC 62439-3:2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439-3:2010.
PRPEach PRP node, called a double attached node with PRP (DAN), is attached to twoindependent LANs operated in parallel. These parallel networks in PRP are calledLAN A and LAN B. The networks are completely separated to ensure failureindependence, and they can have different topologies. Both networks operate inparallel, thus providing zero-time recovery and continuous checking of redundancy toavoid communication failures. Non-PRP nodes, called single attached nodes (SANs),are either attached to one network only (and can therefore communicate only withDANs and SANs attached to the same network), or are attached through a redundancybox, a device that behaves like a DAN.
Ethernet switchIEC 61850 PRPEthernet switch
SCADACOM600
GUID-334D26B1-C3BD-47B6-BD9D-2301190A5E9D V2 EN
Figure 7: PRP solution
In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRPnetworks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or anEthernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN toremove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some cases, defaultPC workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length Ethernet frameswith the PRP trailer.
There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to aPRP network.
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 29Application Manual
![Page 36: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
• Via an external redundancy box (RedBox) or a switch capable of connecting toPRP and normal networks
• By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN• By connecting the node to the protection relay's interlink port
HSRHSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring, treating the twodirections as two virtual LANs. For each frame sent, a node, DAN, sends two frames,one over each port. Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and eachnode forwards the frames it receives, from one port to the other. When the originatingnode receives a frame sent to itself, it discards that to avoid loops; therefore, no ringprotocol is needed. Individually attached nodes, SANs, such as laptops and printers,must be attached through a “redundancy box” that acts as a ring element. For example,a 615 or 620 series protection relay with HSR support can be used as a redundancybox.
GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V2 EN
Figure 8: HSR solution
2.7.3 Process bus
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2 defines the transmission of Sampled Measured Valueswithin the substation automation system. International Users Group created aguideline IEC 61850-9-2 LE that defines an application profile of IEC 61850-9-2 tofacilitate implementation and enable interoperability. Process bus is used fordistributing process data from the primary circuit to all process bus compatibledevices in the local network in a real-time manner. The data can then be processed byany protection relay to perform different protection, automation and control functions.
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
30 RED615Application Manual
![Page 37: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with currentand voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGearDigital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to alldevices, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.
With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value canbe replaced with Ethernet communication. Transmitting measurement samples overprocess bus brings also higher error detection because the signal transmission isautomatically supervised. Additional contribution to the higher availability is thepossibility to use redundant Ethernet network for transmitting SMV signals.
Common EthernetStation bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization
GO
OS
E
SM
V
GO
OS
E
SM
V
SM
V
GO
OS
E
GO
OS
E
SM
V
GO
OS
E
SM
V
SM
V
GO
OS
E
SM
V
GO
OS
E
GUID-2371EFA7-4369-4F1A-A23F-CF0CE2D474D3 V5 EN
Figure 9: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck
The 615 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analogcurrents and voltages. The measured values are transferred as sampled values usingthe IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol which uses the same physical Ethernet network as theIEC 61850-8-1 station bus. The intended application for sampled values is sharing themeasured voltages from one 615 series protection relay to other devices with phasevoltage based functions and 9-2 support.
The 615 series protection relays with process bus based applications use IEEE 1588 v2Precision Time Protocol (PTP) according to IEEE C37.238-2011 Power Profile forhigh accuracy time synchronization. With IEEE 1588 v2, the cabling infrastructurerequirement is reduced by allowing time synchronization information to betransported over the same Ethernet network as the data communications.
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 31Application Manual
![Page 38: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
IEC 61850
HSR
SMV
tra
ffic
Backup 1588
master clock
Managed HSR
Ethernet
switch
Primary
IEEE 1588 v2
master clock
Secondary
IEEE 1588 v2
master clock
(optional)
Managed HSR
Ethernet
switch
GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V5 EN
Figure 10: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE1588 v2 time synchronization
The process bus option is available for all 615 series protection relays equipped withphase voltage inputs. Another requirement is a communication card with IEEE 1588v2 support (COM0031...COM0037). However, RED615 supports this option onlywith the communication card variant having fiber optic station bus ports. See the IEC61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration details.
2.7.4 Secure communication
The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transferprotocol. If the Secure Communication parameter is activated, protocols require TLSbased encryption method support from the clients. In this case WHMI must beconnected from a Web browser using the HTTPS protocol and in case of file transferthe client must use FTPS.
2.7.5 Protection communication and supervision
The communication between the relays is enabled by means of a dedicated fiber opticcommunication channel. 1310 nm multi-mode or single-mode fibers with LCconnectors are used for line differential communication. The channel is used fortransferring the phase segregated current value data between the relays. The currentphasors from the two relays, geographically located apart from each other, must betime coordinated so that the current differential algorithm can be executed correctly.The so called echo method is used for time synchronization. No external devices suchas GPS clocks are thereby needed for the line differential protection communication.
Section 2 1MRS756498 NRED615 overview
32 RED615Application Manual
![Page 39: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
Apart from the continued protection communication, the communication channel canalso be used for binary signal transfer (BST) that is, transferring of user configurablebinary information between the relays. There are a total of eight BST signals availablefor user definable purposes. The BST signals can originate from the relay’s binaryinputs or internal logics, and be assigned to the remote relay’s binary outputs orinternal logics.
The protection communication supervision continuously monitors the protectioncommunication link. The relay immediately blocks the line differential protectionfunction in case that severe interference in the communication link, risking the correctoperation of the function, is detected. An alarm signal will eventually be issued if theinterference, indicating permanent failure in the protection communication, persists.The two high-set stages of the overcurrent protection are further by default released.
RED615 RED615
Fibre-optic line differential communication link
Protection communication and supervisionBinary signal transfer
GUID-8CE71CC9-F0EA-4BE9-B693-173CAEA9FA58 V2 EN
Figure 11: Fiber optic protection communication link
1MRS756498 N Section 2RED615 overview
RED615 33Application Manual
![Page 40: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
34
![Page 41: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
Section 3 RED615 standard configurations
3.1 Standard configurations
RED615 is available with five alternative standard configurations. The standardsignal configuration can be altered by means of the signal matrix or the graphicalapplication functionality of the Protection and Control IED Manager PCM600.Further, the application configuration functionality of PCM600 supports the creationof multi-layer logic functions utilizing various logical elements including timers andflip-flops. By combining protection functions with logic function blocks the relayconfiguration can be adapted to user specific application requirements.
The relay is delivered from the factory with default connections described in thefunctional diagrams for binary inputs, binary outputs, function-to-functionconnections and alarm LEDs. Some of the supported functions in RED615 must beadded with the Application Configuration tool to be available in the Signal Matrix tooland in the relay. The positive measuring direction of directional protection functionsis towards the outgoing feeder.
Table 9: Standard configurations
Description Std. conf.Line differential protection A
Line differential protection with directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breakercondition monitoring B
Line differential protection with non-directional earth-fault protection and circuit-breakercondition monitoring C
Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltageand frequency based protection and measurements, synchro-check and circuit-breakercondition monitoring (RTD option, optional power quality and fault locator)
D
Line differential protection with directional overcurrent and earth-fault protection, voltageand frequency based protection and measurements, and circuit-breaker conditionmonitoring (sensor inputs, optional power quality, fault locator and synchro-check withIEC 61850-9-2 LE)
E
Table 10: Supported functions
Function IEC 61850 A B C D EProtectionThree-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, low stage PHLPTOC 1 1 1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, highstage
PHHPTOC 2 2 2
Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection,instantaneous stage
PHIPTOC 1 1 1 1 1
Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, low stage DPHLPDOC 2 2Three-phase directional overcurrent protection, high stage DPHHPDOC 1 1
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 35Application Manual
![Page 42: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 A B C D ENon-directional earth-fault protection, low stage EFLPTOC 2 Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage EFHPTOC 1 Non-directional earth-fault protection, instantaneous stage EFIPTOC 1 Directional earth-fault protection, low stage DEFLPDEF 2 1) 2 2 2)
Directional earth-fault protection, high stage DEFHPDEF 1 1) 1 1 2)
Admittance-based earth-fault protection 3) EFPADM (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)
Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection 3) WPWDE (3) 1)3) (3) 3) (3) 2)3)
Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF 1 1)4) 1 4) 1 2)4)
Harmonics-based earth-fault protection 3) HAEFPTOC (1)3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4) (1) 3)4)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, usingcalculated Io
EFHPTOC 1 1 1
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 2 2 2 2 2Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC 1 1 1 1Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV 3 1) 3 3 2)
Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3 3Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3 3Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV 1 1Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV 1 1Frequency protection FRPFRQ 4 4Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables anddistribution transformers
T1PTTR 1 1 1 1
Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants T2PTTR 1 1 1 1Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO 1 1 1 1 1Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 1 5) 1 1 1 1
Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 1 1 1 1 1Switch onto fault CBPSOF 1 1 1 1 1Master trip TRPPTRC 2 2 2 2 2Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC 18 18 18 18 18Fault locator SCEFRFLO (1) (1)Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF 1 1 1 1 1High-impedance fault detection PHIZ 1 1 1 1 Power qualityCurrent total demand distortion CMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage variation PHQVVR (1) 6) (1) 6)
Voltage unbalance VSQVUB (1) 6) (1) 6)
ControlCircuit-breaker control CBXCBR 1 1 1 1 1Disconnector control DCXSWI 2 2 2 2 2Earthing switch control ESXSWI 1 1 1 1 1Disconnector position indication DCSXSWI 3 3 3 3 3Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 2 2 2 2 2Autoreclosing DARREC (1) (1) (1) (1)Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 1 (1) 7)
Condition monitoring and supervisionCircuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1 1 1 1Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 2 2 2 2 2Current circuit supervision CCSPVC 1 1 1 1 1Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 1 1Protection communication supervision PCSITPC 1 1 1 1 1Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT 1 1 1 1 1Measurement
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
36 RED615Application Manual
![Page 43: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
Function IEC 61850 A B C D EDisturbance recorder RDRE 1 1 1 1 1Load profile record LDPRLRC 1 1 1 1 1Fault record FLTRFRC 1 1 1 1 1Three-phase current measurement CMMXU 1 1 1 1 1Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 1 1 1 1 1Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 1 1 1 1Three-phase voltage measurement VMMXU 2 1
(1) 7)
Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 1 1 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 1 1Three-phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 1 1RTD/mA measurement XRGGIO130 (1) Frequency measurement FMMXU 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value sending 7)8) SMVSENDER (1) (1)
IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled value receiving (voltage sharing)7)8)
SMVRCV (1) (1)
OtherMinimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, second resolution) TPSGAPC 1 1 1 1 1Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs, minute resolution) TPMGAPC 1 1 1 1 1Pulse timer (8 pcs) PTGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC 4 4 4 4 4Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC 2 2 2 2 2Analog value scaling (4 pcs) SCA4GAPC 4 4 4 4 4Integer value move (4 pcs) MVI4GAPC 1 1 1 1 11, 2, ... = Number of included instances. The instances of a protection function represent the number of identical protection function blocks available in thestandard configuration.() = optional
1) "Uo measured" is always used.2) "Uo calculated" is always used.3) One of the following can be ordered as an option: admittance-based E/F, wattmetric-based E/F or harmonics-based E/F.4) "Io measured" is always used.5) "Io calculated" is always used.6) Power quality option includes current total demand distortion, voltage total harmonic distortion, voltage variation and voltage unbalance.7) Available only with IEC 61850-9-28) Available only with COM0031...0037
3.1.1 Addition of control functions for primary devices and the useof binary inputs and outputs
If extra control functions intended for controllable primary devices are added to theconfiguration, additional binary inputs and/or outputs are needed to complement thestandard configuration.
If the number of inputs and/or outputs in a standard configuration is not sufficient, itis possible either to modify the chosen standard configuration in order to release somebinary inputs or binary outputs which have originally been configured for otherpurposes, or to integrate an external input/output module, for example RIO600, to theprotection relay.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 37Application Manual
![Page 44: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
The external I/O module’s binary inputs and outputs can be used for the less time-critical binary signals of the application. The integration enables releasing someinitially reserved binary inputs and outputs of the protection relay’s standardconfiguration.
The suitability of the protection relay’s binary outputs which have been selected forprimary device control should be carefully verified, for example make and carry andbreaking capacity. If the requirements for the primary device control circuit are notmet, using external auxiliary relays should be considered.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
38 RED615Application Manual
![Page 45: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
3.2 Connection diagrams
GUID-7A5D7398-4E4E-4B45-A561-01E3AF4C1640 V1 EN
Figure 12: Connection diagram for the A and C configurations
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 39Application Manual
![Page 46: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
GUID-9A18BC7A-D172-4FD4-9C25-BF39C5879E5D V1 EN
Figure 13: Connection diagram for the B configuration
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
40 RED615Application Manual
![Page 47: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
RED615
16
17
1918
X100
67
89
10
111213
15
14
2
1
3
45
22
212324
SO2
TCS2
PO4
SO1
TCS1
PO3
PO2
PO1
IRF
+
-Uaux
20
L1L2L3
S1
S2
P1
P2
P2
P1 S1
S2
da dn
X110
34
56
7
89
10BI 6
BI 5
BI 4
BI 3
BI 2
BI 8
BI 712
13
11
BI 112
X110
16
14
15
19
17
18
22
20
21
SO3
SO2
SO1
23SO4
24
a
nN
A
PositiveCurrentDirection
2)
X120
12
3
4
567
89
1011
12
14Io
IL1
IL2
BI 4
BI 3
BI 2
BI 1
IL3
1/5A
N1/5A
N1/5A
N1/5A
N
X13012
34
56
BI 4
BI 3
BI 2
BI 1
87
9101112
U12B
1314
U1
1516
U2
1718
U3
UoN
N
N
N
60 -
N
210V
60 -210V
60 -210V
60 -210V
60 -210V
6)
X1LAN
X5123456789
B/-A/+
/ TX
/ RX
GNDGNDC
X16Line Differential Protection Communication
X2LAN
IRIG-B -IRIG-B +AGND
1) 3)
X12RXTX
1) 3)
1) 4)
1) 5)
B/-A/+
1) Optional2) The IED features an automatic short-circuit mechanism in the CT connector when plug-in unit is detached3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-454) RS-485 serial bus5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus6) AIM0006 (5U+4BI) Alternative Module AIM0003 (5U+2RTD+1mA)
GUID-28FB3DA2-5BA8-4041-B17D-80C5B5F17D4D V2 EN
Figure 14: Connection diagram for the D configuration
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 41Application Manual
![Page 48: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
RED615
16
17
1918
X100
67
89
10
111213
15
14
2
1
3
45
22
212324
SO2
TCS2
PO4
SO1
TCS1
PO3
PO2
PO1
IRF
+
-Uaux
20
X110
34
56
7
89
10BI 6
BI 5
BI 4
BI 3
BI 2
BI 8
BI 712
13
11
BI 112
X110
16
14
15
19
17
18
22
20
21
SO3
SO2
SO1
23SO4
24
X1LAN
X5123456789
B/-A/+
/ TX
/ RX
GNDGNDC
X16Line Differential Protection Communication
X2LAN
IRIG-B -IRIG-B +AGND
1) 3)
X12RXTX
1) 3)
1) 4)
1) 5)
B/-A/+
1) Optional3) 100BaseFx / LC or 100BaseTx / RJ-454) RS-485 serial bus5) Fibre Optic (ST) Serial Bus
X130
12
X131
45
IL1
78
U1
X132
45
IL2
78
U2
X133
45
IL3
78
U3
Io0,2/1A
N
P2
P1 S1
S2
PositiveCurrentDirection
L1
L2
L3
GUID-D6DCAA04-E7EA-4926-BEED-D7BD476C9142 V1 EN
Figure 15: Connection diagram for the E configuration
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
42 RED615Application Manual
![Page 49: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
3.3 Standard configuration A
3.3.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection is intended for cablefeeder applications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 43Application Manual
![Page 50: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
3.3.2 Functions
RED615 AT REMOTE
END
SOTFSOTF
COMMUNICATION
Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP
CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION
ALSO AVAILABLE
- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI
ORAND
LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI
STANDARDCONFIGURATION
RL
ClearESCI
O
Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization
RL
ClearESCI
O
U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
A
With in-zone power transformer supportRED615
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
Analog interface types 1)
Current transformer
Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
CB
DC
ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for
primary object3) Status indication function for primary object
1 -
2 3
1 2
- I, Io- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components
4
-
A
REMARKS
Optionalfunction
No. ofinstances
Alternative function to be defined when ordering
OR
Io/Uo
Calculatedvalue
3×
Sum of phase currents
I∑
PCSPCS
OPTSOPTM
2×TCSTCM
2×I2>46
3I>>>50P/51P
2×Master Trip
Lockout relay94/86
3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF
3I2f>68
3I>51P-1
2×3I>>
51P-23dI>L87L
MCS 3IMCS 3I
BSTBST
PHIZHIZ
18×MAPMAP
3I
IoI∑
3I
GUID-78F52211-9D37-4A2F-9527-CD61BDEA68A2 V2 EN
Figure 16: Functionality overview for standard configuration A
3.3.2.1 Default I/O connections
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
44 RED615Application Manual
![Page 51: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
Table 11: Default connections for binary inputs
Binary input DescriptionX110-BI2 External start of breaker failure protection
X110-BI3 Setting group change
X110-BI4 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI5 Disconnector open/truck in
X110-BI6 Disconnector open/truck out
X110-BI7 Earth-switch close
X110-BI8 Earth-switch open
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open
X120-BI4 Lockout reset
Table 12: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal
Table 13: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Current transformer failure detected
6 Phase or negative sequence component over current
7 Breaker failure operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Trip circuit supervision alarm
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 45Application Manual
![Page 52: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
3.3.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings
Table 14: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
Table 15: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
10 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
11 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
12 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
13 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
14 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
15 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
16 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
46 RED615Application Manual
![Page 53: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode28 X110BI4 - binary transfer Level trigger off
29 X110BI2 - ext ccbrbrf start Level trigger off
30 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
31 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
32 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
3.3.3 Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.
3.3.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection
The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.
The line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intendedto be the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings, if ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration, itis activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker and earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate position. The intention of thisconnection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage by multiplyingwith the setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 47Application Manual
![Page 54: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHIPTOC1 can beblocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. The instantaneous and first highstage are blocked by activation of line differential protection.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
NOTIN OUT
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS
OPERATESTART
STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START
GUID-214BD8DC-0A09-4BD2-BF07-0AD63322734C V2 EN
Figure 17: Line differential protection functions
PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_START
GUID-1EC75CEC-F8EC-4181-9EA6-B077515E9347 V1 EN
Figure 18: Overcurrent protection functions
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
48 RED615Application Manual
![Page 55: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous and the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START
GUID-53A4ACB1-873E-4AA6-A478-536C7BA0E03F V1 EN
Figure 19: Upstream blocking logic
The output BLK2H of the three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers thepossibility to either block the function or multiply the active settings for any of theavailable overcurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-76C18EB4-E3EC-427D-B47A-9E1BFD2DBA5E V1 EN
Figure 20: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. Both the negative-sequence overcurrent protectionfunctions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.
NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
GUID-80E6D94D-4D46-4B79-8383-3C6C3577E763 V2 EN
Figure 21: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 49Application Manual
![Page 56: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
The overcurrent protection and negative-sequence overcurrentprotection are used as backup protection against line differentialprotection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purposes.
The circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input bynumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT
CB_FAULT_ALTRBU
TRRET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
GUID-ED51D248-8DD6-45C2-8B99-8A4885023125 V1 EN
Figure 22: Circuit breaker failure protection function
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary outputs X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided witha lockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting.If the lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATEX120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUTGUID-8768D080-5A99-4E2D-8E01-FDD152866526 V1 EN
Figure 23: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
50 RED615Application Manual
![Page 57: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC2_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUTCCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-8EC8BF92-8C1B-4315-A462-6A661E013089 V1 EN
Figure 24: Trip logic TRPPTRC2
3.3.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.
RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64
TRIGGERED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFERX110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
GUID-7A54A97D-ED30-4EF9-A3CF-F0F21EA72AAB V2 EN
Figure 25: Disturbance recorder
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 51Application Manual
![Page 58: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
3.3.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring
CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measure thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.
CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL
ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-3C8B9191-F624-40FF-BE4E-54B68FC6760F V2 EN
Figure 26: Current circuit supervision function
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. Both functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM
TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-35D08B4E-51FC-4118-AD4C-0C046AA23550 V1 EN
Figure 27: Trip circuit supervision function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
52 RED615Application Manual
![Page 59: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
GUID-5EF1437A-0FC1-43BD-8BCA-4525748A3F10 V1 EN
Figure 28: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSITPC1OK
WARNINGALARMCOMM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-1C5B59EA-A7A6-4ED4-AA51-392008C46EBA V2 EN
Figure 29: Protection communication supervision
Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binary information whichcan be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking and alarms. There areeight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI4 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected tothe binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8
RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CCSPVC1_FAIL
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
GUID-6E428F3A-5652-4573-BFEC-71E5893CE434 V2 EN
Figure 30: Binary signal transfer
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 53Application Manual
![Page 60: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
3.3.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
GUID-42D1B156-F8DC-47AE-8B49-689E1A4F9930 V1 EN
Figure 31: Disconnector 1 control logic
ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
GUID-1FCBEC78-041D-49E7-8440-F24B71B0979E V1 EN
Figure 32: Earth-switch 1 control logic
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for thecircuit breaker is always enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.
CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP
SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL
OP_REQCL_REQ
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOSOPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD
FALSE
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
TRUE
CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
GUID-0644C4E5-EBFA-477B-90B0-7D22E168972A V2 EN
Figure 33: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
54 RED615Application Manual
![Page 61: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.
ORB1B2
O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CL
GUID-31AF7051-A62F-4596-B317-36090DEE3235 V1 EN
Figure 34: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
GUID-444B84F9-F5D9-4BA4-9EDC-344CD77F0ED7 V1 EN
Figure 35: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
ANDB1B2
O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUTTRPPTRC2_TRIP
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
LOCAL_FEEDER_READYDCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
GUID-48415567-5620-4D8C-BEDE-545846CBAB67 V1 EN
Figure 36: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.
Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 55Application Manual
![Page 62: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-546ECBD3-B766-45AF-9FF5-948DCA545C6F V1 EN
Figure 37: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-361E5BC0-42E9-49D8-ABCE-8677BFA017A1 V1 EN
Figure 38: External opening command for circuit breaker 1
3.3.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available by using themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.
The load profile record function LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet.LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe the loading history of the correspondingfeeder.
CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-8B4CEF31-8A1D-40B8-9FCB-E9D2905CA6D5 V1 EN
Figure 39: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
GUID-60EF9EC2-4E85-4236-A57D-4D663A2B340A V1 EN
Figure 40: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
56 RED615Application Manual
![Page 63: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD
GUID-7680B583-F7CC-4C51-B4F4-07071AA72925 V2 EN
Figure 41: Other measurement: Data monitoring
LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-D1F501B2-6430-4E72-A889-3B5838D45918 V2 EN
Figure 42: Other measurement: Load profile record
3.3.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs
X110_BI3_SG_CHANGE
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110_BI4_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110_BI2_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-5FB90F71-13E8-4A40-8F9E-EB5131350578 V1 EN
Figure 43: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4GUID-02B39637-DED0-4D63-A9FE-A4FB30994B9E V1 EN
Figure 44: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 57Application Manual
![Page 64: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-65B379D4-FE8D-45EC-8ACF-933E37B249F5 V1 EN
Figure 45: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-1D17D025-275D-47B2-90D0-F95635D6CEFD V1 EN
Figure 46: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
58 RED615Application Manual
![Page 65: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
LED1OKALARMRESET
LED2OKALARMRESET
LED3OKALARMRESET
LED4OKALARMRESET
LED5OKALARMRESET
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-DAF8EA20-89B5-48D6-B6E7-5B844BFD7A7B V2 EN
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 59Application Manual
![Page 66: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
LED6OKALARMRESET
LED7OKALARMRESET
LED8OKALARMRESET
LED9OKALARMRESET
LED10OKALARMRESET
LED11OKALARMRESET
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-8A7C2989-86B4-40D7-871F-4AFCB28E598D V2 EN
Figure 47: Default LED connection
3.3.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics
The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
TPGAPC1IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-F96BFC4E-C609-4176-901A-5B9EEC2CFAA9 V2 EN
Figure 48: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
60 RED615Application Manual
![Page 67: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
TPGAPC2IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
ORB1B2
O
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
PHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
GUID-CB98021B-214D-4A49-816D-91CDE2D603C1 V1 EN
Figure 49: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse
3.3.3.8 Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,high impedance fault detection PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devicesMDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and control functions. Thesefunctions are not included in application configuration but they can be added based onthe system requirements.
3.4 Standard configuration B
3.4.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection includingdirectional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feederapplications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line currentdifferential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. The configurationalso includes additional options for selecting earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principles.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 61Application Manual
![Page 68: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
3.4.2 Functions
RED615 AT REMOTE
END
SOTFSOTF
COMMUNICATION
Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP
CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION
ALSO AVAILABLE
- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI
ORAND
LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI
STANDARDCONFIGURATION
RL
ClearESCI
O
Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization
RL
ClearESCI
O
U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
A
With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 B
3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
Analog interface types 1)
Current transformer
Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
CB
DC
ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for
primary object3) Status indication function for primary object
1 -
2 3
1 2
- I, Io, Uo- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components
4
1
O→I79
REMARKS
Optionalfunction
No. ofinstances
Alternative function to be defined when ordering
OR
Io/Uo
Calculatedvalue
3×
2×I2>46
I2/I1>46PD
3Ith>F49F
3I>>>50P/51P
2×Master Trip
Lockout relay94/86
2×Io>→67N-1
Io>>→67N-2
Io>IEF→67NIEF
3×Uo>59G
Io>>51N-2
3I>51P-1
3I2f>68
3×Yo>→21YN
3×Po>→32N
OR
2×3I>>
51P-2CBCMCBCM
OPTSOPTM
2×TCSTCM
MCS 3IMCS 3I
PCSPCS
BSTBST
3dI>L87L
Io>HA51NHA
OR
PHIZHIZ
18×MAPMAP
3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C
3I
Uo
Uo
Io
Io
Io
3I
GUID-6AB801FF-A43F-40D6-8D70-D27EF2F402B0 V2 EN
Figure 50: Functionality overview for standard configuration B
3.4.2.1 Default I/O connections
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
62 RED615Application Manual
![Page 69: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
Table 16: Default connections for binary inputs
Binary input DescriptionX110-BI1 Lockout reset
X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication
X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication
X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open
Table 17: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal
Table 18: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Autoreclose in progress
6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 63Application Manual
![Page 70: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
3.4.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings
Table 19: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
Table 20: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
13 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
14 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
64 RED615Application Manual
![Page 71: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode15 DEFLPDEF3 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
16 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
17 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
18 ROVPTOV3 - start Positive or Rising
19 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
20 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
21 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
22 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
23 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
24 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
25 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
26 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
27 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
ROVPTOV3 - operate
28 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
29 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
30 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
31 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
32 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
33 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
34 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
35 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
36 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 65Application Manual
![Page 72: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode37 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
38 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
39 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
40 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
41 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
3.4.3 Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The residual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either residually connectedVTs or an open delta connected VT.
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.
3.4.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection
The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,the input is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breakerand earth-switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intentionof this connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
66 RED615Application Manual
![Page 73: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. The three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneousstage PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120: BI1. Theinstantaneous and first high stage are blocked by activation of line differentialprotection.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
NOTIN OUT
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS
OPERATESTART
STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START
GUID-AD84AF5C-400B-41C3-91D6-949E65CAA3AF V2 EN
Figure 51: Line differential protection functions
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 67Application Manual
![Page 74: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_START
GUID-548C92CC-518C-48A8-B87B-EED122805E8C V1 EN
Figure 52: Overcurrent protection functions
The upstream blocking both from the start of the instantaneous as well as the highstage overcurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1.This output can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START
GUID-4B78CBAB-A4CD-4E1D-A881-CB07EB4B9E98 V1 EN
Figure 53: Upstream blocking logic
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the ordercode, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventionaldirectional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together withadmittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM or wattmetric-based earth-faultprotection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. Inaddition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-basedearth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensatednetworks.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
68 RED615Application Manual
![Page 75: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
GUID-7CE4340B-32CA-4C2A-BD23-B658F983AC26 V1 EN
Figure 54: Directional earth-fault protection
INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTBLK_EF
INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START
GUID-0F6D8EB0-A3F2-4998-8606-5B437F3B1FF6 V1 EN
Figure 55: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 69Application Manual
![Page 76: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_START
WPWDE_OPERATE
GUID-3C742FD7-5543-44A2-8067-FE696CEA8382 V1 EN
Figure 56: Wattmetric protection
EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
EFPADM_OPERATE
GUID-7BF18144-47E9-4893-9483-3FAEF7305665 V1 EN
Figure 57: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
70 RED615Application Manual
![Page 77: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
Non-directional earth-fault protection EFHPTOC protects against double earth-faultsituations in isolated or compensated networks.
EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFHPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILEFHPTOC1_START
GUID-1940E3D0-47D5-43EE-83A8-D168E00149B9 V2 EN
Figure 58: Cross-country earth-fault protection
The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-692057DE-53FB-46D9-89A7-F1EFF039261B V1 EN
Figure 59: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The negative-sequence overcurrent protectionfunctions are blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.
NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
GUID-10D0C21D-0607-411C-82D7-8F610AD9A94D V2 EN
Figure 60: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function
The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in thenormal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. Thefunction is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 71Application Manual
![Page 78: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-2B586B9A-9BB7-40F7-81CD-5F3DF685AA47 V2 EN
Figure 61: Phase discontinuity protection
Two three-phase thermal protection functions are incorporated, one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_START
GUID-FF27FA66-67F0-4C88-9082-B40763180076 V1 EN
Figure 62: Thermal overcurrent protection function
The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
72 RED615Application Manual
![Page 79: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
ROVPTOV3BLOCK OPERATE
START
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
ROVPTOV3_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
ROVPTOV3_START
ROVPTOV_OPERATE
GUID-C3B58F13-0F77-423E-9130-33D80079CD37 V1 EN
Figure 63: Residual voltage protection function
It should be noted that overcurrent protection, negative sequence overcurrentprotection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection and residual overvoltageprotections are all used as backup protection against line differential protection. Thebackup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2 whichcan be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 73Application Manual
![Page 80: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC
OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT
INPROLOCKED
PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL
AR_ONREADYACTIVE
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-1002F280-77C3-4183-9D8C-C1A9491EA948 V1 EN
Figure 64: Autoreclosing function
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT
CB_FAULT_ALTRBU
TRRET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATEPDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-FEC1A53B-56F4-47AB-93E0-9E6E8BD69CEF V1 EN
Figure 65: Circuit breaker failure protection function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
74 RED615Application Manual
![Page 81: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATEWPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
EFHPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
GUID-314936ED-1932-452F-AD19-785984517B0B V1 EN
Figure 66: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 75Application Manual
![Page 82: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-30C131EA-7088-46A1-B58F-8F138563EA94 V1 EN
Figure 67: Trip logic TRPPTRC2
3.4.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
76 RED615Application Manual
![Page 83: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64
TRIGGERED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV3_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
WPWDE1_STARTEFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
WPWDE2_START
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
WPWDE3_START
DARREC1_INPRO
CCSPVC1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_STARTPDNSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
EFHPTOC1_START
ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_STARTROVPTOV3_STARTINTRPTEF1_START
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
GUID-268B3D85-D897-488A-9B7F-8494B63DCF50 V2 EN
Figure 68: Disturbance recorder
3.4.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring
CCSPVC1 detects failure in the current measuring circuits. When a failure is detected,it can be used to block current protection functions that measure calculated sequencecomponent currents or residual current to avoid unnecessary operation.
CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL
ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-5078A248-6EC5-4061-AE60-1AD139C07EFC V2 EN
Figure 69: Current circuit supervision function
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.
Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 77Application Manual
![Page 84: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T
TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALMOPR_LO
IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM
PRES_ALMPRES_LO
OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS
CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO
GUID-C245CA67-6353-4AC0-B004-FF962F2DE242 V1 EN
Figure 70: Circuit-breaker condition monitoring function
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO
SSCBR1_ALARMS
GUID-5B9CD6B2-864D-446E-AF08-FB69DB807E65 V1 EN
Figure 71: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm
NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-55A52E9F-8B13-49D9-8882-756A5476E72E V1 EN
Figure 72: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.
Set parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
78 RED615Application Manual
![Page 85: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM
TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-DECD965E-2872-41A6-B046-BAC70B2833C7 V1 EN
Figure 73: Trip circuit supervision function
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
GUID-DC549599-4B1C-494B-BB34-F56026644379 V1 EN
Figure 74: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSITPC1OK
WARNINGALARMCOMM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-BAE83A0F-1C32-43F4-B77B-B7EE8CDBFCE8 V2 EN
Figure 75: Protection communication supervision function
The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO1 inputs 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to theinput 8.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 79Application Manual
![Page 86: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. Also the remote binary transfer output signal is connected tothe binary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8
RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CCSPVC1_FAIL
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
GUID-4AEBA6EE-A7A7-420D-81C4-332109FA18D2 V2 EN
Figure 76: Binary signal transfer function
3.4.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
GUID-F19F7A81-7B9B-412C-BC89-B389307012A5 V1 EN
Figure 77: Disconnector 1 control logic
ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
GUID-0496B254-C7CF-420D-86DD-E625012BF389 V1 EN
Figure 78: Earth-switch 1 control logic
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines whether the disconnector or circuitbreaker truck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This output,together with the open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal to the circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for thecircuit breaker is always enabled.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
80 RED615Application Manual
![Page 87: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the breaker closing in the local IED.
Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.
CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP
SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL
OP_REQCL_REQ
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOSOPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD
TRUE
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
GUID-96E28E0A-0306-450B-8B90-2923AC1F47B5 V2 EN
Figure 79: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
ORB1B2
O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
GUID-8A675478-7A5A-496D-A943-0EA4BACA6900 V1 EN
Figure 80: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
GUID-AE6AFF59-FED2-40E5-BDD0-48ED49F694FF V1 EN
Figure 81: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 81Application Manual
![Page 88: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUT
NOTIN OUT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
GUID-70637FEC-196D-40FB-950B-EA9698FD2121 V1 EN
Figure 82: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic
Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-84F804B6-C264-4302-9A95-2E3F49094559 V1 EN
Figure 83: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.
Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-8D2F88B3-A27B-4E69-A02E-D52176525437 V1 EN
Figure 84: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
82 RED615Application Manual
![Page 89: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-5C8FB700-8CA1-49AB-A7B4-D6FA09B5EDF2 V1 EN
Figure 85: External opening command for circuit breaker 1
3.4.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.
The residual voltage input is connected to the X120 card in the back panel and ismeasured by the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-9F56B67F-3575-4B74-8AA5-3E21C345A348 V1 EN
Figure 86: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
GUID-5D25FB19-03A1-4219-9646-46D3EB75497F V1 EN
Figure 87: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-D7D2CA02-D35D-4A2E-B58A-4DBC24284EF3 V1 EN
Figure 88: Current measurement: Residual current measurement
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 83Application Manual
![Page 90: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
RESVMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-302309FA-D627-4EB9-A5AF-3C5C3DACBB6F V1 EN
Figure 89: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement
FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD
GUID-3E9B8AE8-FAF5-47CA-BB9F-F8156E3C78C6 V2 EN
Figure 90: Other measurement: Data monitoring
LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-D112C16E-7F50-4D49-960A-D38864F4724D V2 EN
Figure 91: Other measurement: Load profile record
3.4.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-C41ADC88-88C5-4472-A2A2-8786CCF6F829 V1 EN
Figure 92: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
84 RED615Application Manual
![Page 91: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3GUID-676FEBEB-5405-478E-AE6A-2B67ECA8ABBB V1 EN
Figure 93: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-B36EC7FB-6FD6-43C4-8EE4-D4FA8D6F6874 V1 EN
Figure 94: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-47B2D69C-8123-4C8F-B991-23B7CF6203FE V1 EN
Figure 95: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 85Application Manual
![Page 92: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
LED1OKALARMRESET
LED2OKALARMRESET
LED3OKALARMRESET
LED4OKALARMRESET
LED5OKALARMRESET
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-C6F6FBBA-3D33-45E5-9ECA-D7B16B8A44CE V2 EN
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
86 RED615Application Manual
![Page 93: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
LED6OKALARMRESET
LED7OKALARMRESET
LED8OKALARMRESET
LED9OKALARMRESET
LED10OKALARMRESET
LED11OKALARMRESET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
SSCBR1_ALARMS
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-7B65F94B-1348-4472-9495-AD53803043D3 V2 EN
Figure 96: Default LED connection
3.4.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics
The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
TPGAPC1IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-7ECCC7B0-4347-46C0-B3D1-AF4C7B1F8430 V2 EN
Figure 97: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 87Application Manual
![Page 94: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
TPGAPC2IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
EFPDAM_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
WPWDE_OPERATEROVPTOV_OPERATE
GUID-65003347-878B-49F5-A451-4EE2F7061C1A V1 EN
Figure 98: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse
3.4.3.8 Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection functionMAPGAPC, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detectionfunction PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and fewinstances of different types of timers and control functions. These functions are notincluded in application configuration but they can be added based on the systemrequirements.
3.5 Standard configuration C
3.5.1 Applications
The standard configuration for line current differential protection including non-directional earth-fault protection and autoreclosing is mainly intended for cable feederapplications in the distribution networks. The standard configuration for line currentdifferential protection includes support for in-zone transformers.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
88 RED615Application Manual
![Page 95: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
3.5.2 Functions
RED615 AT REMOTE
END
ALSO AVAILABLE
- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI
ORAND
LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI
STANDARDCONFIGURATION
REMARKS
Optionalfunction
No. ofinstances
Alternative function to be defined when ordering
OR
Io/Uo
Calculatedvalue
3×
RL
ClearESCI
O
Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization
RL
ClearESCI
O
U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
A
With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 C
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1) MEASUREMENT
Analog interface types 1)
Current transformer
Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
CB
DC
ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for
primary object3) Status indication function for primary object
1 -
2 3
1 2
- I, Io- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components
4
-
O→I79
2×Master Trip
Lockout relay94/86
Io>>51N-2
BSTBST
Io>HA51NHA
3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF
2×I2>46
I2/I1>46PD
3Ith>F49F
3I>>>50P/51P
3I>51P-1
3I2f>68
2×3I>>
51P-23dI>L87L
SOTFSOTF
18×MAPMAP
COMMUNICATION
Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 Modbus®
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP
CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION
OPTSOPTM
2×TCSTCM
MCS 3IMCS 3I
PCSPCS
CBCMCBCM
PHIZHIZ
Io>>>50N/51N
2×Io>
51N-1
3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C
3I
Io
Io
Io
3I
GUID-C4999021-E1FE-4D55-AB91-FC7C6963501B V2 EN
Figure 99: Functionality overview for standard configuration C
3.5.2.1 Default I/O connections
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 89Application Manual
![Page 96: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
Table 21: Default connections for binary inputs
Binary input DescriptionX110-BI1 External start of breaker failure protection
X110-BI2 Binary signal transfer input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker low gas pressure alarm
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in (service position) indication
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck out (service position) indication
X110-BI7 Earthing switch closed indication
X110-BI8 Earthing switch open indication
X120-BI1 Blocking input for general use
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker close
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker open
X120-BI4 Lockout reset
Table 22: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit breaker
X100-PO2 Breaker failure backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection trip alarm
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Open circuit breaker/trip 1
X100-PO4 Open circuit breaker/trip 2
X110- SO1 Upstream overcurrent blocking
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal
Table 23: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operate
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operate
3 Line differential protection is not available
4 Protection communication failure
5 Autoreclose in progress
6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Current transformer failure or trip circuit or circuit breaker supervision
10 Binary signal transfer receive
11 Binary signal transfer send
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
90 RED615Application Manual
![Page 97: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
3.5.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings
Table 24: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
Table 25: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 PHHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 PHHPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
6 PHLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
7 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
8 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
9 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
10 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
12 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
13 EFIPTOC1- start Positive or Rising
14 EFLPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 EFLPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
16 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
17 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
18 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
19 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 91Application Manual
![Page 98: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode20 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
PHHPTOC1 - operate
PHHPTOC2 - operate
PHLPTOC1 - operate
21 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
22 T1PTTR1- operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
23 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
24 EFIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
EFHPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC1 - operate
EFLPTOC2 - operate
25 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
26 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
27 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
28 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
29 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
30 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
31 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
32 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
33 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
34 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
35 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
36 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
3.5.3 Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
92 RED615Application Manual
![Page 99: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.
3.5.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection
The functional diagrams describe the IED's protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configurationit is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
Four non-directional overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuitprotection. Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection, instantaneous stage,PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizing the binary input X120:BI1. Theinstantaneous and first high stages are blocked by activation of line differentialprotection.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 93Application Manual
![Page 100: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
NOTIN OUT
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS
OPERATESTART
STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START
GUID-95B0A554-5C39-4F26-A640-F78788B2FA00 V2 EN
Figure 100: Line differential protection functions
PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHHPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING INRPHAR1_BLK2HLNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
PHIPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC1_START
PHHPTOC2_START
PHxPTOC_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_START
Grouped function operate
B
GUID-27D40A12-2206-4ADE-AA31-9366909740BF V1 EN
Figure 101: Overcurrent protection functions
The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
94 RED615Application Manual
![Page 101: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_START
GUID-FFE28D0E-8985-4E5C-A14B-CB6DE0B30D72 V1 EN
Figure 102: Upstream blocking logic
Four stages are provided for non-directional earth-fault protection. According to theorder code, the configuration can also include optional harmonics-based earth-faultprotection HAEFPTOC1. On detection of current circuit failure, all earth-faultfunctions are blocked to inhibit unwanted operation, which can occur due to apparentresidual current.
EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFLPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFLPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
EFxPTOC_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_START
EFIPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC1_START
EFLPTOC2_START
GUID-0E48EAFB-CE67-46B6-88A8-59B4957D7E5B V2 EN
Figure 103: Earth-fault protection functions
The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 95Application Manual
![Page 102: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-7F2BFC97-5C00-40C0-ABBA-3FC501D58D5D V1 EN
Figure 104: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The negative sequence overcurrent protections areblocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of current transformer.
NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
GUID-3DF9A5C8-F9D5-44B7-BBF6-23B50666086B V2 EN
Figure 105: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function
The phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in thenormal three-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations. Thefunction is blocked in case of detection in failure in secondary circuit of currenttransformer.
PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-74381B2D-CA6F-445F-A1CC-6096EC6AA562 V2 EN
Figure 106: Phase discontinuity protection
Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
96 RED615Application Manual
![Page 103: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_START
GUID-C71ADCD1-5E9F-47CF-AF75-D8CD007C423A V1 EN
Figure 107: Thermal overcurrent protection function
The negative-sequence overcurrent protection, phase discontinuityprotection and earth-fault protection are all used as backup protectionagainst line differential protection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...5 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclosing sequences for each input.
The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas the closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 97Application Manual
![Page 104: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC
OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT
INPROLOCKED
PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL
AR_ONREADYACTIVE
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-963EDA28-A80A-4E12-A265-9804FB4429EA V1 EN
Figure 108: Autorecloser function
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED as well as externally bybinary input X110:BI1. The circuit breaker failure protection function offers differentoperating modes associated with the circuit breaker position and the measured phaseand residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breakerfeeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT
CB_FAULT_ALTRBU
TRRET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
GUID-3C4BA546-C7F2-4BEE-B081-73C7AD74CE4E V1 EN
Figure 109: Circuit breaker failure protection function
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X120:BI4 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
98 RED615Application Manual
![Page 105: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC1_TRIP
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
EFHPTOC1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATELNPLDF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
GUID-97428C4E-DEE5-44DB-8C51-455FB2D9F1E1 V1 EN
Figure 110: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHLPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEPHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
EFHPTOC1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATECCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-ADD6D3E1-D539-4D7A-8096-715DD0B3D7D8 V1 EN
Figure 111: Trip logic TRPPTRC2
3.5.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 99Application Manual
![Page 106: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64
TRIGGERED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
PHLPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
PHHPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFIPTOC1_OPERATE
EFLPTOC1_OPERATEEFLPTOC2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
PHIPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC1_STARTPHHPTOC2_STARTPHLPTOC1_START
T1PTTR1_START
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_INPRO
CCSPVC1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_STARTPDNSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
EFHPTOC1_STARTEFIPTOC1_STARTEFLPTOC1_STARTEFLPTOC2_START
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_START DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
GUID-C658211A-FDF1-4ECB-AD66-34E603CE8E4A V2 EN
Figure 112: Disturbance recorder
3.5.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring
CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measurecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.
CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL
ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-57D1F65C-2438-4C84-926D-8D21A1FAB8E7 V2 EN
Figure 113: Current circuit supervision function
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
100 RED615Application Manual
![Page 107: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T
TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALMOPR_LO
IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM
PRES_ALMPRES_LO
OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS
CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO
GUID-E16440E7-97F8-4BA5-A65A-8832F72F6333 V1 EN
Figure 114: Circuit breaker condition monitoring alarm
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO
SSCBR1_ALARMS
GUID-CA85737C-AE1C-4BB1-B7AC-97A97EB90DAD V1 EN
Figure 115: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm
NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-9B1B6395-2EAC-4927-9D9E-77EE41162FF6 V1 EN
Figure 116: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included; TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 101Application Manual
![Page 108: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM
TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-521ECF9A-25C2-4582-8D40-1EA572E4C847 V1 EN
Figure 117: Trip circuit supervision function
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
GUID-36DBAACC-5D67-414F-89E1-DAB5F6411181 V1 EN
Figure 118: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSITPC1OK
WARNINGALARMCOMM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-807946BF-54A3-4205-8409-DC71A4518C36 V2 EN
Figure 119: Protection communication supervision function
The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO1 is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO input 6 and 7. These are interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected to theinput 8.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
102 RED615Application Manual
![Page 109: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to thebinary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8
RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CCSPVC1_FAIL
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
GUID-7ACC6207-5896-4449-9E89-BAFA92A73010 V2 EN
Figure 120: Binary signal transfer function
3.5.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected instandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
GUID-F151A155-141D-4581-9218-30796B22E7F0 V1 EN
Figure 121: Disconnector 1 control logic
ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
GUID-8FF4B653-B8F2-4A83-AEB0-D0A371F8E7F1 V1 EN
Figure 122: Earthswitch 1 control logic
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 103Application Manual
![Page 110: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the breaker closing in the local IED.
Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.
CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP
SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL
OP_REQCL_REQ
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOSOPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD
TRUE
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
GUID-B9EB21FF-B3F1-4604-875E-D679BF21A5D0 V2 EN
Figure 123: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
ORB1B2
O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
GUID-033E6103-FCE5-460E-AB2C-127523940A3E V1 EN
Figure 124: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB
GUID-304247AE-6DEC-494B-AEDD-C884E5C42731 V1 EN
Figure 125: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
104 RED615Application Manual
![Page 111: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUT
NOTIN OUT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
GUID-BB477666-A6B7-43C1-AE6B-D20528F6EDFC V1 EN
Figure 126: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic
Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-8DFAE731-FCD9-4B2B-B0AF-04D1E35FCD1E V1 EN
Figure 127: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.
Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-1BAF2BFA-27D8-4E23-81F9-3D0B8F916E56 V1 EN
Figure 128: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 105Application Manual
![Page 112: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-B2A3DFEB-8777-40F7-AA7B-39FD2EEF3F09 V1 EN
Figure 129: External opening command for circuit breaker 1
3.5.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.
Load profile record LDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1offers the ability to observe the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-B3B20052-DF2B-4C6F-AFFC-DF6EBE403620 V1 EN
Figure 130: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
GUID-5541207C-33F0-4C30-BC61-FA4B4828ED6E V1 EN
Figure 131: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-8C5CCD15-3A6D-494F-B1CF-A96EC9C7D8C5 V1 EN
Figure 132: Current measurement: Residual current measurement
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
106 RED615Application Manual
![Page 113: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD
GUID-557D77EF-39F9-4E45-B681-4214A621ABBF V2 EN
Figure 133: Other measurement: Data monitoring
LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-86C0CEA1-CD8A-4D98-83DE-D9F56D43A917 V2 EN
Figure 134: Other measurement: Load profile record
3.5.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110_BI1_EXT_CCBRBRF_START
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8GUID-7EFCB700-0C8D-48F8-8616-61A3E64F6C4B V1 EN
Figure 135: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 107Application Manual
![Page 114: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI4_RST_LOCKOUT
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 4GUID-C10DB2F8-2663-4CDC-B032-F425F58578D9 V1 EN
Figure 136: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-C643DA33-07A8-41F1-89E9-DD9CB7237283 V1 EN
Figure 137: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-0ACF5C83-087E-44ED-AA03-03376F3F090C V1 EN
Figure 138: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
108 RED615Application Manual
![Page 115: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
LED1OKALARMRESET
LED2OKALARMRESET
LED3OKALARMRESET
LED4OKALARMRESET
LED5OKALARMRESET
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-47DBECE3-D6D9-47CB-ACA7-A7D3B54613EA V2 EN
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 109Application Manual
![Page 116: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
LED6OKALARMRESET
LED7OKALARMRESET
LED8OKALARMRESET
LED9OKALARMRESET
LED10OKALARMRESET
LED11OKALARMRESET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_ALARMT1PTTR1_ALARM
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
SSCBR1_ALARMS
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-81B95D0E-F4E0-4BE7-A2F6-ABFC9D885FF5 V2 EN
Figure 139: Default LED connection
3.5.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics
The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to the minimumpulse timer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. Theoutput from TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
TPGAPC1IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-FBFAE053-C586-47D2-9D37-918400B7516B V2 EN
Figure 140: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
110 RED615Application Manual
![Page 117: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
TPGAPC2IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSEBACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
EFxPTOC_OPERATEPHxPTOC_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
GUID-E7E999CE-55E3-443A-95A2-4BF9339375AD V1 EN
Figure 141: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse
3.5.3.8 Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detection functionPHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and few instances ofdifferent types of timers and control functions. These functions are not included inapplication configuration but they can be added based on the system requirements.
3.6 Standard configuration D
3.6.1 Applications
The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cablefeeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.
Standard configuration D is not designed for using all the available functionalitycontent in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and thirdinstances of voltage protection functions must be added with the ApplicationConfiguration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specificconfiguration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 111Application Manual
![Page 118: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
3.6.2 Functions
COMMUNICATION
Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1/-9-2LE Modbus®
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP
CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION
ALSO AVAILABLE
- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data - Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI
ORAND
LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI
STANDARDCONFIGURATION
RL
ClearESCI
O
Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization
RL
ClearESCI
O
U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
A
With in-zone power transformer supportRED615 D
3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF
OPTSOPTM
2×TCSTCM
2×I2>46
I2/I1>46PD
3Ith>F49F
3I>>>50P/51P
2×Master Trip
Lockout relay94/86
MCS 3IMCS 3I
PCSPCS
BSTBST
CBCMCBCM
2×3I>→67-1
3I2f>68
3I>>→67-2
3dI>L87L
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
CB
DC
ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for
primary object3) Status indication function for primary object
1 -
2 3
1 2
REMARKS
Optionalfunction
No. ofinstances
Alternative function to be defined when ordering
OR
Io/Uo
Calculatedvalue
3×
MEASUREMENT
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- RTD/mA measurement (optional)- Symmetrical components
Analog interface types 1)
Current transformer
Voltage transformer1) Conventional transformer inputs2) One of the five inputs is reserved for
future applications
2)
4
5
O→I79
FUSEF60
PQM3IPQM3I
PQM3UPQM3V
PQMUPQMV
SYNC25
U12
U12
3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C
f>/f<,df/dt81
3×Uo>59G
3I
Uo
Uo
Io
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1UL2UL3
18×MAPMAP
FLOC21FL
2xRTD1xmA SOTF
SOTF
2×Io>→67N-1
Io>>→67N-2
Io>IEF→67NIEF
Io>>51N-2
3×Yo>→21YN
3×Po>→32N
OR
Io>HA51NHA
OR
PHIZHIZ
3I
Io
Io
3×3U<27
U2>47O-
U1<47U+
3×3U>59
UL1
UL2
UL3
RED615 AT REMOTE
END
3I
4×PQUUBPQVUB
GUID-F76822E6-DDB6-44F2-8704-5A5B3035BAFD V2 EN
Figure 142: Functionality overview for standard configuration D
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
112 RED615Application Manual
![Page 119: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
3.6.2.1 Default I/O connections
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.
Table 26: Default connections for binary inputs
BIO card DescriptionX110-BI1 Lockout reset
X110-BI2 Binary transfer signal input
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker gas pressure alarm signal
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker spring charged indication
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in service
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in test
X110-BI7 Earthing switch in closed position
X110-BI8 Earthing switch in opened position
X120-BI1 External blocking signal for overcurrent instantaneous stage
X120-BI2 Circuit breaker in closed position
X120-BI3 Circuit breaker opened position
X120-BI4 -
Table 27: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Close circuit close command
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker failed signal - Backup trip to upstream breaker
X100-SO1 Line differential protection operated
X100-SO2 Protection communication failure or differential protection not available
X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command
X100-PO4 Master trip 2 activated
X110- SO1 Blocking signal for upstream overcurrent protection
X110- SO2 Backup protection operated
X110- SO3 Binary transfer signal
X110- SO4 -
Table 28: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description1 Line differential protection biased stage operated
2 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated
3 Line differential protection not active
4 Protection communication supervision alarm
5 Autoreclose operation in progress
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 113Application Manual
![Page 120: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
LED Description6 Backup protection operated
7 Circuit breaker failure protection - backup trip operate
8 Disturbance recorder triggered
9 Supervision alarm
10 Binary transfer signal received
11 Binary transfer signal send
3.6.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings
Table 29: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
Table 30: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
114 RED615Application Manual
![Page 121: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising
32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37 NSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off
39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 115Application Manual
![Page 122: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTUV2 - operate
49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
52 SEQSPVC - fusef 3ph Level trigger off
53 SEQSPVC - fusef u Level trigger off
54 X110BI4 - CB spring charged Level trigger off
55 X110BI3 - gas pressure alarm Level trigger off
56 X120BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
57 X120BI2 - CB closed Level trigger off
58 X120BI1 - ext OC blocking Level trigger off
59 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
60 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
3.6.3 Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from a current transformer. Theresidual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected CTs, anexternal core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
116 RED615Application Manual
![Page 123: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from a voltage transformer. Theresidual voltage to the protection relay is fed from either residually connected VTs, anopen delta connected VT or calculated internally.
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.
3.6.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
Alarm LED3 informs when the line differential is not available possibly due to afailure in protection communication, or if the function is set in a test mode.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 117Application Manual
![Page 124: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
NOTIN OUT
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS
OPERATESTART
STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE
REMOTE_FEEDER_READY
LNPLDF1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAIL
REMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
LNPLDF1_START
GUID-611D4EF5-AABC-487D-A52C-DF018335EC23 V2 EN
Figure 143: Line differential protection functions
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Threeof them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directionalovercurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 can be blocked by energizingthe binary input X120:BI1.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
118 RED615Application Manual
![Page 125: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEX120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_START
DPHHPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC2BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_START
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
GUID-54378804-2337-4274-83AD-186C666871E0 V1 EN
Figure 144: Overcurrent protection functions
The upstream blocking from the start of the instantaneous as well as the high stageovercurrent protection function is connected to the binary output X110:SO1. Thisoutput can be used to send a blocking signal to the relevant overcurrent protectionstage of the IED at the upstream bay.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKINGPHIPTOC1_START
GUID-A8F61C44-1CA7-4B82-8271-52E1469CDF37 V1 EN
Figure 145: Upstream blocking logic
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to the ordercode, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based on conventionaldirectional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together with admittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-fault protectionWPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. In addition, there isa dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-based earth-faultprotection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensated networks.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 119Application Manual
![Page 126: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
GUID-CCDDEA70-4B90-414E-B10B-E65F9710D122 V1 EN
Figure 146: Directional earth-fault protection function
INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTBLK_EF
INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START
GUID-C531508C-CB98-42F7-AF49-0D056C0D0E92 V1 EN
Figure 147: Transient or intermittent earth-fault protection function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
120 RED615Application Manual
![Page 127: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_START
WPWDE_OPERATE
GUID-5E88FC8D-A67B-4C50-8EEC-B06EDC7B1FA5 V1 EN
Figure 148: Wattmetric protection function
EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
EFPADM_OPERATE
GUID-AD669779-AC0D-4AC9-AB1A-A1448469F4EB V1 EN
Figure 149: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 121Application Manual
![Page 128: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,EFHPTOC protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.
EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFHPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_START
GUID-169A80DA-A6A3-4BF5-9065-F78EFB23121C V1 EN
Figure 150: Cross-country earth-fault protection
The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-6E272ED2-8A8D-47A0-9D96-095912F1894B V1 EN
Figure 151: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance.
NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
GUID-1114A789-B912-4053-B00A-5DF48069E33F V1 EN
Figure 152: Negative-sequence overcurrent protection function
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normalthree-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATEPDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-109761C8-E52A-43F5-B3D2-95C402F79515 V1 EN
Figure 153: Phase discontinuity protection
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
122 RED615Application Manual
![Page 129: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated, one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_START
GUID-98DD8187-875F-4B44-977C-3B4097DE9D25 V1 EN
Figure 154: Thermal overcurrent protection function
Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offerprotection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances ofPHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequenceundervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protectionfunctions enable voltage-based unbalance protection. A failure in the voltagemeasuring circuit is detected by the fuse failure function and the activation isconnected to block undervoltage protection functions and voltage based unbalanceprotection functions to avoid faulty tripping.
PHPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
ORB1B2
O
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTOV_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2_START
GUID-9C062068-BF92-419D-BF9B-23F1CADE7444 V2 EN
Figure 155: Overvoltage protection function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 123Application Manual
![Page 130: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
PHPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTUV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
ORB1B2
O
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
PHPTUV_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2_START
GUID-57AFB769-5CB0-41B2-9360-F705B44B2B2B V3 EN
Figure 156: Undervoltage protection function
The residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting an abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.
ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
ORB1B2
O
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATEROVPTOV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
GUID-FBEA2623-82A1-4F1E-8AD8-FA4E958D3F18 V2 EN
Figure 157: Residual voltage protection function
NSPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTNSPTOV1_OPERATESEQSPVC1_FUSEF_UNSPTOV1_START
GUID-E1E4377A-82F7-4C71-BDC8-C5D680E824D8 V2 EN
Figure 158: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPSPTUV1_OPERATESEQSPVC1_FUSEF_UPSPTUV1_START
GUID-247948E4-57BB-4945-B6E9-85E149DED994 V2 EN
Figure 159: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
124 RED615Application Manual
![Page 131: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
The overcurrent protection, negative-sequence overcurrentprotection, phase discontinuity, earth-fault protection, residualovervoltage protection, phase overvoltage and undervoltageprotection are all used as backup protection against line differentialprotection.
The backup protection operated information is available at binary output X110:SO2which can be used for external alarm purpose.
The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC
OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT
INPROLOCKED
PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL
AR_ONREADYACTIVE
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATENSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-94B242D2-EE8E-4E0B-B0D4-774317C8FC70 V1 EN
Figure 160: Autoreclosing function
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The TRBU output is used to give a backup trip to the breaker
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 125Application Manual
![Page 132: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
feeding upstream. For this purpose, the TRBU operate output signal is connected to thebinary output X100:PO2.
CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT
CB_FAULT_ALTRBU
TRRET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-527012AF-B080-4E51-BF8C-5888C2C4C4EA V1 EN
Figure 161: Circuit breaker failure protection function
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output of these trip logic functions is available atbinary output X100:PO3 and X100:PO4. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is selected, binary input X110:BI1 can be assigned toRST_LKOUT input of both the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
126 RED615Application Manual
![Page 133: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
GUID-2C4612B0-8C10-4CF1-BD5F-39E0DCD01F9D V2 EN
Figure 162: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 127Application Manual
![Page 134: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
GUID-F3A60700-5E46-4F06-8D96-765FBCF5729E V2 EN
Figure 163: Trip logic TRPPTRC2
3.6.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
128 RED615Application Manual
![Page 135: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64
TRIGGERED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARMX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
CCSPVC1_FAIL
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
PHIPTOC1_STARTDEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_START
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DPHHPDOC1_STARTDPHLPDOC1_STARTDPHLPDOC2_START
INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START
PDNSPTOC1_START
PHPTOV1_STARTPHPTOV2_START
NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
T1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_START
LNPLDF1_START
ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START
PSPTUV1_STARTNSPTOV1_STARTPHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_START
LNPLDF_RSTD2H
T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH
DARREC1_INPRO
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
GUID-66D3883A-0972-4CF4-B376-3C2B42AFA141 V3 EN
Figure 164: Disturbance recorder
3.6.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring
CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.
CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL
ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-6D7C2FDE-A876-4ABA-B67D-C796339C0F96 V2 EN
Figure 165: Current circuit supervision function
Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC1 detects failures in the voltage measurementcircuits at bus side. Failures, such as an open MCB, raise an alarm.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 129Application Manual
![Page 136: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
SEQSPVC1BLOCKCB_CLOSEDDISCON_OPENMINCB_OPEN
FUSEF_3PHFUSEF_UX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTSEQSPVC1_FUSEF_USEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PH
GUID-4A101AD2-2735-4154-9872-04E4AF5611C6 V2 EN
Figure 166: Fuse failure supervision function
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR1 supervises the switchstatus based on the connected binary input information and the measured currentlevels. SSCBR1 introduces various supervision methods.
Set parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T
TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALMOPR_LO
IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM
PRES_ALMPRES_LO
OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS
CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCB_OPEN_COMMAND
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGEDCB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO
GUID-5357065F-5B56-4478-831F-5F761EF68D8E V1 EN
Figure 167: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO
SSCBR1_ALARMS
GUID-851424FB-003E-4B56-83F2-9D6DEB4FA8D8 V1 EN
Figure 168: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm
NOTIN OUTX110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-85AE4A88-0F81-4692-AB72-F76886830EDF V1 EN
Figure 169: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the circuit breaker opensignal.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
130 RED615Application Manual
![Page 137: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
It is assumed that there is no external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM
TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-62930E10-32E5-4921-90A5-054F5549A863 V1 EN
Figure 170: Trip circuit supervision function
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC2_TRIP
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
TRPPTRC1_TRIP TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
GUID-9DE42D33-5655-4E55-A2F2-0637375ED830 V1 EN
Figure 171: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC is used in the configuration to blockthe operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of the linedifferential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs during theprotection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internally withoutconnections in the configurations. The protection communication supervision alarmis connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary output X100:SO2.
PCSITPC1OK
WARNINGALARMCOMM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-58C48BE3-531B-44BE-A181-0E5F2CFDC098 V2 EN
Figure 172: Protection communication supervision function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 131Application Manual
![Page 138: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, one physical input X110:BI2 is connected to the binary signaltransfer channel one. Local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs. The remote binary transfer output signal is connected to thebinary output X110:SO3.
BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8
RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
CCSPVC1_FAILREMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_ABSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
GUID-87A8E8D2-1554-4778-BF8C-B810F92C8F9E V2 EN
Figure 173: Binary signal transfer function
3.6.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1.
DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
GUID-E64DC447-49CC-4B85-9F45-22476C09D978 V1 EN
Figure 174: Disconnector 1 control logic
ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI8_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
GUID-28CD15D7-2D66-449B-9268-129D9739D602 V1 EN
Figure 175: Earth-switch 1 control logic
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
132 RED615Application Manual
![Page 139: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.
CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP
SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL
OP_REQCL_REQ
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOSOPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD
TRUE
X120_BI3_CB_OPENEDX120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSEFALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
GUID-6C35F21A-59A7-4EA8-9A6B-6FF1195E2B9D V2 EN
Figure 176: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.
ORB1B2
O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
GUID-85700A51-C7A3-4CE2-82DD-BE499AED6BBA V1 EN
Figure 177: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CB_OPEN_COMMANDTRPPTRC1_TRIPCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB
GUID-BDEE048C-67D8-4979-B135-5CBEAE8EC89E V1 EN
Figure 178: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 133Application Manual
![Page 140: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSEREMOTE_FEEDER_READYLOCAL_FEEDER_READY
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUT
NOTIN OUT
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
GUID-7A1BC865-FEEC-483B-902A-FA63B943377F V1 EN
Figure 179: Circuit breaker 1 close enable logic
Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-50A9F154-A417-4EF5-A3D8-41F165016CF6 V1 EN
Figure 180: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.
Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if applicable for the application.
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-F4165FE3-89D0-442D-AE06-DE100001A9F8 V1 EN
Figure 181: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
134 RED615Application Manual
![Page 141: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-234BEA35-18B0-41CA-9B82-F7F4F098DBA7 V1 EN
Figure 182: External opening command for circuit breaker 1
3.6.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by three-phasevoltage measurement VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected to the X130 card inthe back panel. The sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measures the sequencevoltage and the residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU1 measures the residualvoltage.
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.
The frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phasepower and energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile recordLDPRLRC1 is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability toobserve the loading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-D90049A9-79DB-4509-8FCF-698EA072ED0C V1 EN
Figure 183: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
GUID-B673B40B-4BC5-4B68-A9EA-D7B775EDDE1B V1 EN
Figure 184: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 135Application Manual
![Page 142: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-5F19BB51-E128-4264-92CE-80919279D13C V1 EN
Figure 185: Current measurement: Residual current measurement
VMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-185F1398-111B-4110-A7EF-A3DA5C402034 V1 EN
Figure 186: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement
VSMSQI1
GUID-DC4A3CBE-B6FD-4010-BA67-57D51816E5A2 V1 EN
Figure 187: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement
RESVMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-67A789F2-B77F-42BD-8137-0AC44E5FF554 V1 EN
Figure 188: Voltage measurement: Residual voltage measurement
FMMXU1
GUID-5273D289-0FE3-47D3-B57A-0BA22B5EC842 V1 EN
Figure 189: Other measurement: Frequency measurement
PEMMXU1RSTACM
GUID-D2FA74CF-B6E0-46F7-80D8-AEAE9B36A063 V1 EN
Figure 190: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement
FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD
GUID-2FC37793-AF71-4854-A84A-70CCEEA56E32 V2 EN
Figure 191: Other measurement: Data monitoring
LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-668FDBE4-A071-4F49-9142-2BCA9129622B V2 EN
Figure 192: Other measurement: Load profile record
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
136 RED615Application Manual
![Page 143: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
3.6.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs
X110_BI3_GAS_PRESSURE_ALARM
X110_BI4_CB_SPRING_CHARGED
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110_BI8_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI7_ES1_CLOSED
X110_BI1_RST_LOCKOUT
X110_BI2_BINARY_TRANSFER
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
GUID-F761D951-A662-402A-B61A-D9E5FBCAA3F4 V1 EN
Figure 193: Binary inputs - X110 terminal block
X120_BI3_CB_OPENED
X120_BI2_CB_CLOSED
X120_BI1_EXT_OC_BLOCKING
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 1
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 2
X120 (AIM).X120-Input 3GUID-8E0F1D9B-9E5C-405E-B22A-0E5535EDF43D V1 EN
Figure 194: Binary inputs - X120 terminal block
UPSTREAM_OC_BLOCKING
REMOTE_BINARY_TRANSFER
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
X110 (BIO).X110-SO1
X110 (BIO).X110-SO2
X110 (BIO).X110-SO3GUID-299FE861-9452-4002-A3E6-18ADD61E3FE4 V1 EN
Figure 195: Binary outputs - X110 terminal block
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 137Application Manual
![Page 144: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSE
LNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-EE457369-A302-45CC-94F4-C44D0CD0A08C V1 EN
Figure 196: Binary outputs - X100 terminal block
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
138 RED615Application Manual
![Page 145: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
LED1OKALARMRESET
LED2OKALARMRESET
LED3OKALARMRESET
LED4OKALARMRESET
LED5OKALARMRESET
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-A1199E6D-B317-495E-B6D9-B083279F43D8 V2 EN
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 139Application Manual
![Page 146: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
LED6OKALARMRESET
LED7OKALARMRESET
LED8OKALARMRESET
LED9OKALARMRESET
LED10OKALARMRESET
LED11OKALARMRESET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_U
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM
SEQSPVC1_FUSEF_3PHTCSSCBR_ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARMSSCBR1_ALARMS
DISTURB_RECORD_TRIGGERED
BSTGGIO1_SEND_SIG_A
BSTGGIO1_RECV_SIG_A
GUID-76D5018B-613B-4D92-B646-A53D972CDB0F V2 EN
Figure 197: Default LED connection
3.6.3.7 Functional diagrams for other timer logics
The configuration also includes line differential operate, inactive communication andbackup protection operate logic. The operate logics are connected to minimum pulsetimer TPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The outputfrom TPGAPC1 is connected to the binary outputs.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
TPGAPC1IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
DIFFERENTIAL_OPERATE_PULSELNPLDF_NOT_ACTIVE_OR_PCSRTPC_ALARM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATELNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVEPCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-3CDDEC1A-AAFA-46E2-8EC0-02005DEE2C07 V2 EN
Figure 198: Timer logic for differential operate and communication not active
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
140 RED615Application Manual
![Page 147: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
TPGAPC2IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE_PULSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATE
DPHxPDOC_OPERATEDEFxPDEF_OPERATE
EFPADM_OPERATEWPWDE_OPERATE
FREQUENCY_OPEATE
PHPTOV_OPERATEPHPTUV_OPERATE
ROVPTOV_OPERATENSPTOC_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
BACKUP_PROT_OPERATE
GUID-39193B88-CF7E-4808-8C0C-3F9F3281AA8A V1 EN
Figure 199: Timer logic for backup protection operate pulse
3.6.3.8 Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, high-impedance fault detectionfunction PHIZ, runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT and differenttypes of timers and control functions. These functions are not included in applicationconfiguration but they can be added based on the system requirements.
3.7 Standard configuration E
3.7.1 Applications
The standard configuration with directional overcurrent and directional earth-faultprotection, phase-voltage and frequency based protection is mainly intended for cablefeeder applications in distribution networks. The standard configuration for linecurrent differential protection includes support for in-zone transformers. Theconfiguration also includes additional options to select earth-fault protection based onadmittance, wattmetric or harmonic principle.
Standard configuration E is not designed for using all the available functionalitycontent in one relay at the same time. Frequency protection functions and thirdinstances of voltage protection functions must be added with the Application
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 141Application Manual
![Page 148: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
Configuration tool. To ensure the performance of the relay, the user-specificconfiguration load is verified with the Application Configuration tool in PCM600.
The protection relay with a standard configuration is delivered from the factory withdefault settings and parameters. The end user flexibility for incoming, outgoing andinternal signal designation within the protection relay enables this configuration to befurther adapted to different primary circuit layouts and the related functionality needsby modifying the internal functionality using PCM600.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
142 RED615Application Manual
![Page 149: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
3.7.2 Functions
RED615 AT REMOTE
END
COMMUNICATION
Protocols: IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850-9-2LE Modbus®
IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3Interfaces: Ethernet: TX (RJ45), FX (LC) Serial: Serial glass fiber (ST), RS-485, RS-232Redundant protocols: HSR PRP RSTP
CONDITION MONITORING AND SUPERVISION
ALSO AVAILABLE
- Binary Signal Transfer function (BST)- Disturbance and fault recorder- Event log and recorded data- Local/Remote push button on LHMI- Self-supervision - Time synchronization: IEEE 1588 v2,
SNTP, IRIG-B- User management- Web HMI
ORAND
LINE DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION AND CONTROL RELAY
PROTECTION LOCAL HMI
CONTROL AND INDICATION 1)
Object Ctrl 2) Ind 3)
CB
DC
ES1) Check availability of binary inputs/outputs
from technical documentation2) Control and indication function for
primary object3) Status indication function for primary object
1 -
2 3
1 2
STANDARDCONFIGURATION
REMARKS
Optionalfunction
No. ofinstances
Alternative function to be defined when ordering
OR
Io/Uo
Calculatedvalue
3×
RL
ClearESCI
O
Configuration ASystemHMITimeAuthorization
RL
ClearESCI
O
U12 0. 0 kVP 0.00 kWQ 0.00 kVAr
IL2 0 A
A
With in-zone power transformer supportRED615
MEASUREMENT
Analog interface types 1)
Current sensor
Voltage sensor
1) Combi sensor inputs with conventionalIo input
Current transformer 1
3
3
- I, U, Io, Uo, P, Q, E, pf, f- Limit value supervision- Load profile record- Symmetrical components
E
3I>/Io>BF51BF/51NBF
OPTSOPTM
2×TCSTCM
2×I2>46
I2/I1>46PD
3Ith>F49F
3I>>>50P/51P
2×Master Trip
Lockout relay94/86
2×Io>→67N-1
Io>>→67N-2
Io>IEF→67NIEF
Io>>51N-2
MCS 3IMCS 3I
PCSPCS
BSTBST
CBCMCBCM
3×Yo>→21YN
3×Po>→32N
OR
Io>HA51NHA
OR
2×3I>→67-1
3I2f>68
3I>>→67-2
3dI>L87L
PQM3IPQM3I
PQM3UPQM3V
PQMUPQMV
O→I79
FUSEF60
18×MAPMAP
FLOC21FL
SOTFSOTF
SYNC25
UL1
UL2
UL3
3Ith>T/G/C49T/G/C
IEC 61850-9-2LE
UL1
UL1UL2UL3
U1<47U+
3I
Io
Io
3I
3I
3×3U<27
U2>47O-
3×3U>59
3×Uo>59G
Uo
f>/f<,df/dt81
PQUUBPQVUB
4×
Io
GUID-D0C7BD80-3FC0-448D-ACD4-D6123319339C V2 EN
Figure 200: Functionality overview for standard configuration E
3.7.2.1 Default I/O connections
Connector pins for each input and output are presented in the IED physicalconnections section.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 143Application Manual
![Page 150: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
Table 31: Default connections for binary inputs
BIO card DescriptionX110-BI1 Circuit breaker plug not inserted
X110-BI2 Circuit breaker spring charged
X110-BI3 Circuit breaker in opened position
X110-BI4 Circuit breaker closed position
X110-BI5 Circuit breaker truck in test
X110-BI6 Circuit breaker truck in service
X110-BI7 Earthing switch in opened position
X110-BI8 Earthing switch in closed position
Table 32: Default connections for binary outputs
Binary input DescriptionX100-PO1 Release for circuit breaker closing
X100-PO2 Circuit breaker closed command
X100-SO1 Release for circuit breaker truck
X100-SO2 Release for earthing switch
X100-PO3 Circuit breaker open command
X100-PO4 Circuit breaker failed signal - Retrip
X110- SO1 -
X110- SO2 -
X110- SO3 -
X110- SO4 -
Table 33: Default connections for LEDs
LED Description1 Circuit breaker close enabled
2 Overcurrent protection operated
3 Earth-fault protection operated
4 Line differential protection instantaneous stage operated
5 Line differential protection biased stage operated
6 Thermal protection
7 Line differential protection not active
8 Protection communication supervision alarm
9 Supervision alarm
10 Circuit breaker monitoring alarm
11 -
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
144 RED615Application Manual
![Page 151: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
3.7.2.2 Default disturbance recorder settings
Table 34: Default disturbance recorder analog channels
Channel Description1 IL1
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 Io
5 Uo
6 U1
7 U2
8 U3
9 -
10 -
11 -
12 -
Table 35: Default disturbance recorder binary channels
Channel ID text Level trigger mode1 LNPLDF1 - start Positive or Rising
2 LNPLDF1 - operate Positive or Rising
3 PHIPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
4 DPHHPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
5 DPHLPDOC1 - start Positive or Rising
6 DPHLPDOC2 - start Positive or Rising
7 NSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
8 NSPTOC2 - start Positive or Rising
9 INTRPTEF1 - start Positive or Rising
10 EFHPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
11 DEFLPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE1 - start
EFPADM1 - start
12 DEFLPDEF2 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE2 - start
EFPADM2 - start
13 DEFHPDEF1 - start Positive or Rising
WPWDE3 - start
EFPADM3 - start
14 PDNSPTOC1 - start Positive or Rising
15 T1PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
Table continues on next page
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 145Application Manual
![Page 152: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode16 T2PTTR1 - start Positive or Rising
17 PHPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
18 PHPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
20 ROVPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
21 ROVPTOV2 - start Positive or Rising
23 PSPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
24 NSPTOV1 - start Positive or Rising
25 PHPTUV1 - start Positive or Rising
26 PHPTUV2 - start Positive or Rising
32 CCBRBRF1 - trret Level trigger off
33 CCBRBRF1 - trbu Level trigger off
34 LNPLDF1 - rstd2h Level trigger off
35 LNPLDF1 - prot not active Level trigger off
36 PHIPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
DPHHPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC1 - operate
DPHLPDOC2 - operate
37 NSPTOC1 - operater Level trigger off
NSPTOC2 - operate
38 INTRPTEF1 - operate Level trigger off
39 EFHPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
40 DEFLPDEF1 - operate Level trigger off
WPWDE1 - operate
EFPADM1 - operate
DEFLPDEF2 - operate
WPWDE2 - operate
EFPADM2 - operate
DEFLPDEF3 - operate
WPWDE3 - operate
EFPADM3 - operate
41 PDNSPTOC1 - operate Level trigger off
42 T1PTTR1 - alarm Level trigger off
43 T2PTTR2 - alarm Level trigger off
44 PHPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTOV2 - operate
45 ROVPTOV1 - operate Level trigger off
ROVPTOV2 - operate
PSPTUV1 - operate
NSPTOV1 - operate
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
146 RED615Application Manual
![Page 153: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Channel ID text Level trigger mode46 T1PTTR1 - operate Level trigger off
T2PTTR2 - operate
47 PHPTUV1 - operate Level trigger off
PHPTUV2 - operate
49 INRPHAR1 - blk2h Level trigger off
50 PCSITPC1 - alarm Level trigger off
51 CCSPVC1 - alarm Level trigger off
52 X110BI2 - CB spring discharged Level trigger off
53 X110BI3 - CB opened Level trigger off
54 X110BI4 - CB closed Level trigger off
55 DARREC1 - unsuc recl Level trigger off
DARREC1 - close CB
56 DARREC1 - inpro Level trigger off
57 General start pulse Level trigger off
58 General operate pulse Level trigger off
3.7.3 Functional diagrams
The functional diagrams describe the default input, output, alarm LED and function-to-function connections. The default connections can be viewed and changed withPCM600 according to the application requirements.
The analog channels have fixed connections to the different function blocks inside theprotection relay’s standard configuration. However, the 12 analog channels availablefor the disturbance recorder function are freely selectable as a part of the disturbancerecorder’s parameter settings.
The phase currents to the protection relay are fed from Rogowski or Combi sensors.The residual current to the protection relay is fed from either residually connectedCTs, an external core balance CT, neutral CT or calculated internally.
The phase voltages to the protection relay are fed from Combi sensors. The residualvoltage is calculated internally.
The protection relay offers six different setting groups which can be set based onindividual needs. Each group can be activated or deactivated using the setting groupsettings available in the protection relay or via binary input.
Depending on the communication protocol the required function block needs to beinstantiated in the configuration.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 147Application Manual
![Page 154: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
3.7.3.1 Functional diagrams for protection
The functional diagrams describe the IEDs protection functionality in detail andaccording to the factory set default connections.
Line differential protection with in-zone power transformer LNPLDF1 is intended tobe the main protection offering exclusive unit protection for the power distributionlines or cables. The stabilized low stage can be blocked if the current transformerfailure is detected. The operate value of the instantaneous high stage can be multipliedby predefined settings if the ENA_MULT_HS input is activated. In this configuration,it is activated by the open status information of the remote-end circuit breaker andearth switch, and if the disconnector is not in the intermediate state. The intention ofthis connection is to lower the setting value of the instantaneous high stage bymultiplying with setting High Op value Mult, in case of internal fault.
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
NOTIN OUT
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
LNPLDF1BLOCKBLOCK_LSENA_MULT_HS
OPERATESTART
STR_LS_LOCSTR_LS_REMOPR_LS_LOCOPR_LS_REMOPR_HS_LOCOPR_HS_REMBLKD2H_LOCBLKD2H_REMPRO_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_OPERATELNPLDF1_START
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYREMOTE_CB_OPEN
REMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_LS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_LOC
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_OPR_HS_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_LOC
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF1_BLKD2H_REM
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
LNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
GUID-87CBED03-0383-4BE8-854E-F7D5F538EA21 V2 EN
Figure 201: Line differential protection functions
Four overcurrent stages are offered for overcurrent and short-circuit protection. Threeof them include directional functionality DPHxPDOC. Three-phase non-directionalovercurrent protection, instantaneous stage, PHIPTOC1 is blocked when linedifferential is active.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
148 RED615Application Manual
![Page 155: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
DPHHPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC1BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC2BLOCKENA_MULTNON_DIR
OPERATESTART
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_START
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEPHIPTOC1_START
LNPLDF1_PROT_ACTIVEINRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-866A9329-0726-48E5-B316-BE9FAC9C3BFE V1 EN
Figure 202: Overcurrent protection functions
Three stages are provided for directional earth-fault protection. According to theIED's order code, the directional earth-fault protection method can be based onconventional directional earth-fault DEFxPDEF only or alternatively together withadmittance-based earth-fault protection EFPADM, wattmetric-based earth-faultprotection WPWDE or harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC. Inaddition, there is a dedicated protection stage INTRPTEF either for transient-basedearth-fault protection or for cable intermittent earth-fault protection in compensatednetworks.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 149Application Manual
![Page 156: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
DEFHPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF1BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
DEFLPDEF2BLOCKENA_MULTRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
GUID-83E3A3E3-FA76-4A2F-A347-E49A5D2BA786 V1 EN
Figure 203: Directional earth-fault protection function
INTRPTEF1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTBLK_EF
INTRPTEF1_OPERATEINTRPTEF1_START
GUID-31918CB0-4497-4D34-8A94-D6E9B9B9E802 V1 EN
Figure 204: Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
150 RED615Application Manual
![Page 157: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
WPWDE1BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE2BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
WPWDE3BLOCKRCA_CTL
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_START
WPWDE_OPERATE
GUID-03F7F19D-876F-4442-B033-BB7B193A944C V1 EN
Figure 205: Wattmetric earth-fault protection function
EFPADM1BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM2BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
EFPADM3BLOCKRELEASE
OPERATESTART
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
EFPADM_OPERATE
GUID-FDCDC5B3-335E-41CB-97E5-F481B5E0F5AF V1 EN
Figure 206: Admittance-based earth-fault protection function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 151Application Manual
![Page 158: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
Non-directional (cross-country) earth-fault protection, using calculated Io,EFHPTOC1 protects against double earth-fault situations in isolated or compensatednetworks. This protection function uses the calculated residual current originatingfrom the phase currents.
EFHPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
EFHPTOC1_OPERATEEFHPTOC1_START
GUID-101DFCBD-67C7-4002-941B-E0F5C338ECD0 V1 EN
Figure 207: Earth-fault protection function
The output BLK2H of three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 offers the possibility toeither block the function or multiply the active settings for any of the availableovercurrent function blocks.
INRPHAR1BLOCK BLK2H INRPHAR1_BLK2H
GUID-0EF609AC-09A6-4B16-93C7-FAD1B59CE0EB V1 EN
Figure 208: Inrush detector function
Two negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages NSPTOC1 and NSPTOC2 areprovided for phase unbalance protection. These functions are used to protect thefeeder against phase unbalance. The function is blocked on detection of failure incurrent secondary circuit.
NSPTOC1BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
NSPTOC2BLOCKENA_MULT
OPERATESTART
ORB1B2
O
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
CCSPVC1_FAIL
CCSPVC1_FAIL
NSPTOC_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_START
NSPTOC2_START
GUID-2C582C54-8D7E-413A-8A4B-52EA6F7962E1 V2 EN
Figure 209: Negative sequence overcurrent protection function
Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 protects for interruptions in the normalthree-phase load supply, for example, in downed conductor situations.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
152 RED615Application Manual
![Page 159: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
PDNSPTOC1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPDNSPTOC1_OPERATECCSPVC1_FAILPDNSPTOC1_START
GUID-B4D669EF-FBC3-4722-AD3C-E4ED6A5F5407 V2 EN
Figure 210: Phase discontinuity protection function
Two thermal overload protection functions are incorporated one with one timeconstant T1PTTR1 and other with two time constants T2PTTR1 for detectingoverloads under varying load conditions. The BLK_CLOSE output of the function isused to block the closing operation of circuit breaker.
T1PTTR1BLK_OPRENA_MULTTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1BLOCKTEMP_AMB
OPERATESTARTALARM
BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
T1PTTR1_OPERATE
T2PTTR1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_START
T2PTTR1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARM
T2PTTR1_START
GUID-DD8DF01A-3462-4564-8AD2-C8C8ADF991AD V1 EN
Figure 211: Thermal overcurrent protection function
Three overvoltage and undervoltage protection stages PHPTOV and PHPTUV offerprotection against abnormal phase voltage conditions. However, only two instances ofPHPTOV and PHPTUV are used in the configuration. Positive-sequenceundervoltage PSPTUV and negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV protectionfunctions enable voltage-based unbalance protection.
PHPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTUV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATE
PHPTUV2_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2_START
PHPTUV1_START
PHPTUV2_START
GUID-FD2018DA-06D2-43A2-B1B9-C304150ED9AD V2 EN
Figure 212: Overvoltage and undervoltage protection function
Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV provides earth-fault protection bydetecting abnormal level of residual voltage. It can be used, for example, as anonselective backup protection for the selective directional earth-fault functionality.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 153Application Manual
![Page 160: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
ROVPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
START
ROVPTOV2BLOCK OPERATE
START
ROVPTOV1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV2_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_START
ROVPTOV2_START
GUID-50003B1E-3AF3-4A9C-8DC4-B24FB1437AE3 V2 EN
Figure 213: Residual overvoltage protection function
NSPTOV1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTNSPTOV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_START
GUID-77086659-9F8C-4D9B-A321-D477719D4E38 V1 EN
Figure 214: Negative sequence overvoltage protection function
PSPTUV1BLOCK OPERATE
STARTPSPTUV1_OPERATEPSPTUV1_START
GUID-D945E695-E908-43EC-85DA-0B0DAD3EEB0D V1 EN
Figure 215: Positive sequence undervoltage protection function
The optional autoreclosing function is configured to be initiated by operate signalsfrom a number of protection stages through the INIT_1...6 inputs. It is possible tocreate individual autoreclose sequences for each input.
The autoreclosing function can be inhibited with the INHIBIT_RECL input. Bydefault, few selected protection function operations are connected to this input. Acontrol command to the circuit breaker, either local or remote, also blocks theautoreclosing function via the CBXCBR1-SELECTED signal.
The circuit breaker availability for the autoreclosing sequence is expressed with theCB_READY input in DARREC1. The signal, and other required signals, are connectedto the CB spring charged binary inputs in this configuration. The open command fromthe autorecloser is connected directly to binary output X100:PO3, whereas closecommand is connected directly to binary output X100:PO1.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
154 RED615Application Manual
![Page 161: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
DARREC1INIT_1INIT_2INIT_3INIT_4INIT_5INIT_6DEL_INIT_2DEL_INIT_3DEL_INIT_4BLK_RECL_TBLK_RCLM_TBLK_THERMCB_POSCB_READYINC_SHOTPINHIBIT_RECLRECL_ONSYNC
OPEN_CBCLOSE_CBCMD_WAIT
INPROLOCKED
PROT_CRDUNSUC_RECL
AR_ONREADYACTIVE
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
DARREC1_OPEN_CBDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATENSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATE
EFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE
DEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATE
WPWDE3_OPERATE
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
DARREC1_INPRO
GUID-CFECED4C-F593-4C8C-AF46-3677D75DF1C4 V1 EN
Figure 216: Autoreclosing function
Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 is initiated via the START input by anumber of different protection functions available in the IED. The circuit breakerfailure protection function offers different operating modes associated with the circuitbreaker position and the measured phase and residual currents.
The circuit breaker failure protection function has two operating outputs: TRRET andTRBU. The TRRET operate output is used for retripping its own breaker throughTRPPTRC2_TRIP. The same TRRET output is also connected to the binary outputX100:PO4.
CCBRBRF1BLOCKSTARTPOSCLOSECB_FAULT
CB_FAULT_ALTRBU
TRRET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OCCBRBRF1_TRRET
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
EFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
WPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
CCBRBRF1_TRBU
GUID-5A56DA6F-3B22-4867-B935-AC209B7A8122 V1 EN
Figure 217: Circuit breaker failure protection function
General start and operate from all the functions are connected to minimum pulse timerTPGAPC1 for setting the minimum pulse length for the outputs. The output fromTPGAPC1 can be connected to binary outputs.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 155Application Manual
![Page 162: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
TPGAPC4IN1IN2
OUT1OUT2
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATE
PHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_STARTDPHLPDOC1_START
DPHHPDOC1_STARTNSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
DEFHPDEF1_STARTDEFLPDEF1_STARTDEFLPDEF2_START
EFPADM1_STARTEFPADM2_STARTEFPADM3_START
INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START
PDNSPTOC1_STARTROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START
NSPTOV1_STARTWPWDE1_STARTWPWDE2_STARTWPWDE3_STARTPSPTUV1_STARTPHPTOV1_START
PHPTOV2_STARTPHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_STARTT1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_STARTLNPLDF1_START
GENERAL_START_PULSEGENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
GUID-C7D2F9C8-CBC9-4588-BBEF-80C90BDF6473 V2 EN
Figure 218: General start and operate signals
The operate signals from the protection functions are connected to the two trip logics:TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2. The output from TRPPTRC1 trip logic functions isavailable at binary output X100:PO3. The trip logic functions are provided with alockout and latching function, event generation and the trip signal duration setting. Ifthe lockout operation mode is required, binary input can be assigned to RST_LKOUTinput of the trip logic to enable external reset with a push button.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
156 RED615Application Manual
![Page 163: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
TRPPTRC1BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC1_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATET1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
GUID-32B07A1D-B7F6-479D-BF3B-3BB5331A863F V2 EN
Figure 219: Trip logic TRPPTRC1
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 157Application Manual
![Page 164: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
TRPPTRC2BLOCKOPERATERST_LKOUT
TRIPCL_LKOUT
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
TRPPTRC2_TRIPPHIPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC2_OPERATEDPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATEDPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATEROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATEPHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATE
NSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
GUID-748AFA48-FAB3-46D7-A9E6-6631028E297F V2 EN
Figure 220: Trip logic TRPPTRC2
3.7.3.2 Functional diagrams for disturbance recorder
The START and the OPERATE outputs from the protection stages are routed to triggerthe disturbance recorder or, alternatively, only to be recorded by the disturbancerecorder depending on the parameter settings. Additionally, the selected signals fromdifferent functions and the few binary inputs are also connected to the disturbancerecorder.
Once the order of signals connected to binary inputs of RDRE ischanged, make the changes to parameter setting tool.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
158 RED615Application Manual
![Page 165: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
RDRE1C1C2C3C4C5C6C7C8C9C10C11C12C13C14C15C16C17C18C19C20C21C22C23C24C25C26C27C28C29C30C31C32C33C34C35C36C37C38C39C40C41C42C43C44C45C46C47C48C49C50C51C52C53C54C55C56C57C58C59C60C61C62C63C64
TRIGGERED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
DARREC1_CLOSE_CB
X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC2_OPERATE
DPHHPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC1_OPERATE
DPHLPDOC1_OPERATE
NSPTOC2_OPERATE
EFPADM1_OPERATEEFPADM2_OPERATEEFPADM3_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
ROVPTOV1_OPERATEROVPTOV2_OPERATE
DEFHPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF1_OPERATEDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
WPWDE1_OPERATEWPWDE2_OPERATEWPWDE3_OPERATE
PHPTOV1_OPERATEPHPTOV2_OPERATE
PHPTUV1_OPERATEPHPTUV2_OPERATE
LNPLDF1_OPERATE
PSPTUV1_OPERATENSPTOV1_OPERATE
T1PTTR1_OPERATET2PTTR1_OPERATE
PHIPTOC1_START
DPHLPDOC2_STARTDPHLPDOC1_STARTDPHHPDOC1_START
NSPTOC1_STARTNSPTOC2_START
DEFHPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF1_START
DEFLPDEF2_START
EFPADM1_START
EFPADM2_START
EFPADM3_START
INTRPTEF1_STARTEFHPTOC1_START
PDNSPTOC1_START
ROVPTOV1_STARTROVPTOV2_START
NSPTOV1_START
WPWDE1_START
WPWDE2_START
WPWDE3_STARTPSPTUV1_START
PHPTOV1_STARTPHPTOV2_START
PHPTUV1_STARTPHPTUV2_START
T1PTTR1_STARTT2PTTR1_START
LNPLDF1_START
INRPHAR1_BLK2H
CCSPVC1_FAILX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
DARREC1_UNSUC_RECL
CCBRBRF1_TRBULNPLDF_BLKD2H
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
DARREC1_INPROGENERAL_START_PULSE
GENERAL_OPERATE_PULSE
GUID-2B380C77-3B2C-4788-8BEC-D1A60316C6F8 V3 EN
Figure 221: Disturbance recorder
3.7.3.3 Functional diagrams for condition monitoring
CCSPVC1 detects failures in the current measuring circuits. When a failure isdetected, it can be used to block the current protection functions that measures thecalculated sequence component currents or residual current to avoid unnecessaryoperation.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 159Application Manual
![Page 166: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
CCSPVC1BLOCK FAIL
ALARMCCSPVC1_FAILCCSPVC1_ALARM
GUID-7544D1F4-3408-4871-BDBD-CD69DE9A2F35 V2 EN
Figure 222: Current circuit supervision function
Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 supervises the switch status based onthe connected binary input information and the measured current levels. SSCBR1introduces various supervision methods.
Set the parameters for SSCBR1 properly.
SSCBR1BLOCKPOSOPENPOSCLOSEOPEN_CB_EXECLOSE_CB_EXEPRES_ALM_INPRES_LO_INSPR_CHR_STSPR_CHRRST_IPOWRST_CB_WEARRST_TRV_TRST_SPR_T
TRV_T_OP_ALMTRV_T_CL_ALMSPR_CHR_ALM
OPR_ALMOPR_LO
IPOW_ALMIPOW_LO
CB_LIFE_ALMMON_ALM
PRES_ALMPRES_LO
OPENPOSINVALIDPOSCLOSEPOS
CB_OPEN_COMMANDCB_CLOSE_COMMAND
X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
CB_SPRING_CHARGEDX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LOSSCBR1_IPOW_ALMSSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALMSSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_LO
GUID-99741CF0-7D88-4AAA-84EF-61E7DC4CBC2A V1 EN
Figure 223: Circuit breaker condition monitoring function
ORB1B2
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
SSCBR1_TRV_T_OP_ALMSSCBR1_TRV_T_CL_ALMSSCBR1_SPR_CHR_ALM
SSCBR1_OPR_ALMSSCBR1_OPR_LO
SSCBR1_IPOW_ALM
SSCBR1_IPOW_LOSSCBR1_CB_LIFE_ALM
SSCBR1_MON_ALMSSCBR1_PRES_ALM
SSCBR1_PRES_LO
SSCBR1_ALARMS
GUID-B6B90A88-8924-4B32-8F2A-DEF3931388FA V1 EN
Figure 224: Logic for circuit breaker monitoring alarm
NOTIN OUT CB_SPRING_CHARGEDX110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
GUID-FA20C086-8CA5-4430-B18F-1FB631480979 V1 EN
Figure 225: Logic for start of circuit breaker spring charging
Two separate trip circuit supervision functions are included: TCSSCBR1 for poweroutput X100:PO3 and TCSSCBR2 for power output X100:PO4. The functions areblocked by both the master trip TRPPTRC1 and TRPPTRC2 and the binary inputX110:BI1 indicating the IED plug out.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
160 RED615Application Manual
![Page 167: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
It is assumed that there is external resistor in the circuit breakertripping coil circuit connected in parallel with the circuit breakernormally open auxiliary contact.
Set the parameters for TCSSCBR1 properly.
TCSSCBR1BLOCK ALARM
TCSSCBR2BLOCK ALARM
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR1_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR2_ALARM
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
TCSSCBR_ALARM
GUID-D5151801-2495-4DF2-A362-F7CB9AE1AFC0 V1 EN
Figure 226: Trip circuit supervision function
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
OTRPPTRC1_TRIPTRPPTRC2_TRIP
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
TCSSCBR_BLOCKING
GUID-7EA01D36-6EB3-41C3-AC1B-CB3536E444C0 V1 EN
Figure 227: Logic for blocking of trip circuit supervision
Protection communication supervision PCSITPC1 is used in the configuration toblock the operation of the line differential function. This way, the malfunction of theline differential is prevented. The activation of binary signal transfer outputs duringthe protection communication failure is also blocked. These are done internallywithout connections in the configurations. The protection communication supervisionalarm is connected to the alarm LED 4, disturbance recorder and binary outputX100:SO2.
PCSITPC1OK
WARNINGALARMCOMM
PCSITPC1_ALARM
GUID-D1562A57-E53D-43C7-BC28-A7E27E95C11A V2 EN
Figure 228: Protection communication supervision function
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 161Application Manual
![Page 168: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
The binary signal transfer function BSTGGIO is used for changing any binaryinformation which can be used for example, in protection schemes, interlocking andalarms. There are eight separate inputs and corresponding outputs available.
In this configuration, local feeder ready and local circuit breaker open information areconnected to the BSTGGIO inputs 6 and 7. This is interlocking information fromcontrol logic. The information of detected current transformer fault is connected toinput 8.
As a consequence of sending interlocking information to remote end, also receiving ofsame information locally is needed. Therefore, remote feeder ready, remote circuitbreaker open and remote current transformer failure are connected to the binary signaltransfer function outputs.
BSTGGIO1SEND_SIG_1SEND_SIG_2SEND_SIG_3SEND_SIG_4SEND_SIG_5SEND_SIG_6SEND_SIG_7SEND_SIG_8
RECV_SIG_1RECV_SIG_2RECV_SIG_3RECV_SIG_4RECV_SIG_5RECV_SIG_6RECV_SIG_7RECV_SIG_8SEND_SIG_ARECV_SIG_A
CBXCBR1_OPENPOSCCSPVC1_FAIL
REMOTE_FEEDER_READYREMOTE_CB_OPENREMOTE_CCSPVC_FAIL
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
GUID-E5BF4D5D-5C15-408A-B9CC-19F8B9499729 V2 EN
Figure 229: Binary signal transfer
3.7.3.4 Functional diagrams for control and interlocking
Two types of disconnector and earthing switch function blocks are available.DCSXSWI1...3 and ESSXSWI1...2 are status only type, and DCXSWI1...2 andESXSWI1 are controllable type. By default, the status only blocks are connected in thestandard configuration. The disconnector (CB truck) and line side earthing switchstatus information is connected to DCSXSWI1 and ESSXSI1 respectively.
The configuration also includes closed enable interlocking logic for disconnector andearthing switch. These signals are available for binary outputs X100:SO1 andX100:SO2 respectively.
DCSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS DCSXSWI1_OKPOS
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TESTX110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O DC1_CLOSE_ENABLEDESSXSWI1_OPENPOSCBXCBR1_OPENPOS
GUID-FCAC88AB-7DA0-4F21-808E-C961DA3BA381 V1 EN
Figure 230: Disconnector 1 interlocking logic
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
162 RED615Application Manual
![Page 169: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
ESSXSWI1POSOPENPOSCLOSE
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOS
ESSXSWI1_OPENPOSX110_BI7_ES1_OPENEDX110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O ES1_CLOSE_ENABLEDX110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
GUID-9A7AC8F3-6187-4203-8D9D-BC9B9D34FA72 V1 EN
Figure 231: Earth-switch 1 control logic
The circuit breaker closing is enabled when the ENA_CLOSE input is activated. Theinput can be activated by the configuration logic, which is a combination of thedisconnector or circuit breaker truck and earth-switch position status, status of the triplogics and remote feeder position indication. Master trip logic, disconnector andearth-switch statuses are local feeder ready information to be sent for the remote end.
The OKPOS output from DCSXSWI defines if the disconnector or circuit breakertruck is either open (in test position) or close (in service position). This, together withthe open earth-switch and non-active trip signals, activates the close-enable signal tothe circuit breaker control function block. The open operation for circuit breaker isalways enabled.
If REMOTE_FEEDER_READY information is missing, forexample, in case of protection communication not connected, itdisables the circuit breaker closing in the local IED.
Any additional signals required by the application can be connectedfor opening and closing of circuit breaker.
CBXCBR1POSOPENPOSCLOSEENA_OPENENA_CLOSEBLK_OPENBLK_CLOSEAU_OPENAU_CLOSETRIPSYNC_OKSYNC_ITL_BYP
SELECTEDEXE_OPEXE_CL
OP_REQCL_REQ
OPENPOSCLOSEPOS
OKPOSOPEN_ENAD
CLOSE_ENAD
TRUE
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSECBXCBR1_EXE_CLCBXCBR1_EXE_OP
CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSE
X110_BI3_CB_OPENEDX110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_OPENCBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CBXCBR1_OPENPOS
CBXCBR1_SELECTED
GUID-26FE1003-2AA2-42AD-8E92-6E84693FBF66 V2 EN
Figure 232: Circuit breaker 1 control logic
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 163Application Manual
![Page 170: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
ORB1B2
O CB_CLOSE_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_CLDARREC1_CLOSE_CB
GUID-1893502C-2D0A-44DF-A2BE-37057971BE78 V1 EN
Figure 233: Signals for closing coil of circuit breaker 1
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CB_OPEN_COMMANDCBXCBR1_EXE_OPTRPPTRC1_TRIP
DARREC1_OPEN_CB
GUID-AD01A758-DC66-4017-9F8A-A4321FF0BB4F V1 EN
Figure 234: Signals for opening coil of circuit breaker 1
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUT
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
CB_SPRING_CHARGED
LOCAL_FEEDER_READY
NOTIN OUT
AND6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
NOTIN OUT
ANDB1B2
O
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
TRPPTRC1_TRIP
TRPPTRC2_TRIP
DCSXSWI1_OKPOSESSXSWI1_OPENPOS
CB_SPRING_CHARGED
TCSSCBR_ALARMGUID-8A8014C7-EF80-45C5-BDCB-81392240A562 V1 EN
Figure 235: Circuit breaker close enable logic
Connect higher-priority conditions before enabling the circuitbreaker. These conditions cannot be bypassed with bypass feature ofthe function.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
164 RED615Application Manual
![Page 171: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O CBXCBR1_BLK_CLOSET1PTTR1_BLK_CLOSET2PTTR1_BLK_CLOSE
GUID-DAFA0354-CBB5-4A1A-AE95-6C61DF47D264 V1 EN
Figure 236: Circuit breaker 1 close blocking logic
The configuration includes logic for generating circuit breaker external closing andopening command with the IED in local or remote mode.
Check the logic for the external circuit breaker closing command andmodify it according to the application.
Connect the additional signals for closing and opening of the circuitbreaker in local or remote mode, if it is applicable for the application.
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXCBR1_AU_CLOSE
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-4C5A7939-3DB5-4E2C-8057-BC2831AC51A9 V1 EN
Figure 237: External closing command for circuit breaker 1
ANDB1B2
O
ANDB1B2
O
ORB1B2
O
FALSE
FALSE
CBXBCR1_AU_OPEN
CONTROL_LOCAL
CONTROL_REMOTE
GUID-F8E822D5-467C-4F65-BC4C-8E224B373771 V1 EN
Figure 238: External opening command for circuit breaker 1
3.7.3.5 Functional diagrams for measurement functions
The phase current inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase currentmeasurement function CMMXU1. The current input is connected to the X120 card inthe back panel. The sequence current measurement CSMSQI1 measures the sequencecurrent and the residual current measurement RESCMMXU1 measures the residualcurrent.
The three-phase bus side phase voltage inputs to the IED are measured by the three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU1. The voltage input is connected tothe X130 card in the back panel. Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 measuresthe sequence voltage.
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 165Application Manual
![Page 172: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
The measurements can be seen in the LHMI and they are available under themeasurement option in the menu selection. Based on the settings, function blocks cangenerate low alarm or warning and high alarm or warning signals for the measuredcurrent values.
Frequency measurement FMMXU1 of the power system and the three-phase powerand energy measurement PEMMXU1 are available. Load profile record LDPRLRC1is included in the measurements sheet. LDPRLRC1 offers the ability to observe theloading history of the corresponding feeder.
CMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-21605B4E-39E0-4B01-AAA8-F9837624B897 V1 EN
Figure 239: Current measurement: Three-phase current measurement
CSMSQI1
GUID-B12A010D-5651-40C2-84E6-DE98FB2446FC V1 EN
Figure 240: Current measurement: Sequence current measurement
RESCMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARN
GUID-D40B9D8C-2274-4C05-A80A-720413B2D9AA V1 EN
Figure 241: Current measurement: Residual current measurement
VMMXU1BLOCK HIGH_ALARM
HIGH_WARNLOW_WARN
LOW_ALARM
GUID-32CBD962-FA4F-4773-8AE8-4CA75080EF3A V1 EN
Figure 242: Voltage measurement: Three-phase voltage measurement
VSMSQI1
GUID-C4C01605-D449-4A1C-8B7F-5445D42529B4 V1 EN
Figure 243: Voltage measurement: Sequence voltage measurement
FMMXU1
GUID-491E5D77-77E0-4BCD-A9AB-CAB90BB34C3D V1 EN
Figure 244: Other measurement: Frequency measurement
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
166 RED615Application Manual
![Page 173: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
PEMMXU1RSTACM
GUID-DFAF0FB2-4B5B-41D4-B32F-C6524E78E15A V1 EN
Figure 245: Other measurement: Three-phase power and energy measurement
FLTRFRC1BLOCKCB_CLRD
GUID-E66A78DE-D1C4-452F-9AB7-2792070EFB23 V2 EN
Figure 246: Other measurement: Data monitoring
LDPRLRC1RSTMEM MEM_WARN
MEM_ALARM
GUID-119EC22D-0241-4FAF-B5D9-9AEC58F98ECC V2 EN
Figure 247: Other measurement: Load profile record
The power quality functions CMHAI1 and VMHAI1 can be used to measure theharmonic contents of the phase current and phase voltages. The voltage variation, thatis, sage and swells can be measured by the voltage variation function PHQVVR1. Bydefault, these power quality functions are not included in the configuration.Depending on the application, the required logic connections can be made byPCM600.
3.7.3.6 Functional diagrams for I/O and alarm LEDs
X110_BI3_CB_OPENED
X110_BI4_CB_CLOSED
X110_BI6_CB_TRUCK_IN_SERVICE
X110_BI5_CB_TRUCK_IN_TEST
X110_BI7_ES1_OPENED
X110_BI8_ES1_CLOSED
X110_BI1_PLUG_OUT
X110_BI2_CB_SPRING_DISCHARGED
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 2
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 3
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 4
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 5
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 6
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 7
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 8
X110 (BIO).X110-Input 1
GUID-B790F48B-CE29-4B6F-9F1E-8999A1305540 V1 EN
Figure 248: Default binary inputs - X110
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 167Application Manual
![Page 174: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
CB_OPEN_COMMAND
CB_CLOSE_COMMAND
CBXCBR1_CLOSE_ENAD
DC1_CLOSE_ENABLED
ES1_CLOSE_ENABLED
CCBRBRF1_TRRET
X100 (PSM).X100-PO1
X100 (PSM).X100-PO2
X100 (PSM).X100-SO1
X100 (PSM).X100-SO2
X100 (PSM).X100-PO3
X100 (PSM).X100-PO4GUID-6D07D6AC-B66C-4352-8580-1333FA32EAFD V1 EN
Figure 249: Default binary outputs - X100
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
168 RED615Application Manual
![Page 175: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
LED1OKALARMRESET
LED2OKALARMRESET
LED3OKALARMRESET
LED4OKALARMRESET
LED5OKALARMRESET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
CBXCBR1_ENA_CLOSE
PHIPTOC1_OPERATE
INTRPTEF1_OPERATE
PDNSPTOC1_OPERATE
EFHPTOC1_OPERATE
LNPLDF_LS_OPERATE
LNPLDF_HS_OPERATE
NSPTOC_OPERATE
DPHxPDOC_OPERATE
DEFxPDEF_OPERATE
EFPADM_OPERATEWPWDE_OPERATE
GUID-AAE166F5-E7EA-4F5C-AD82-A86D094C9007 V2 EN
LED6OKALARMRESET
LED7OKALARMRESET
LED8OKALARMRESET
LED9OKALARMRESET
LED10OKALARMRESET
OR6B1B2B3B4B5B6
O
ORB1B2
O
TCSSCBR_ALARM
LNPLDF1_PROT_NOT_ACTIVE
PCSITPC1_ALARM
T1PTTR1_ALARMT2PTTR1_ALARM
CCSPVC1_ALARM
SSCBR1_ALARMS
GUID-401B69BF-1917-4EE7-A132-A1322C92B1B0 V2 EN
Figure 250: Default LED connection
1MRS756498 N Section 3RED615 standard configurations
RED615 169Application Manual
![Page 176: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
3.7.3.7 Other functions
The configuration includes few instances of multipurpose protection MAPGAPC,fault locator, harmonics-based earth-fault protection, runtime counter for machinesand devices MDSOPT and few instances of different types of timers and controlfunctions. These functions are not included in application configuration but they canbe added based on the system requirements.
Section 3 1MRS756498 NRED615 standard configurations
170 RED615Application Manual
![Page 177: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Section 4 Requirements for measurementtransformers
4.1 Current transformers
4.1.1 Current transformer requirements for overcurrent protection
For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to bechosen carefully. The distortion of the secondary current of a saturated CT mayendanger the operation, selectivity, and co-ordination of protection. However, whenthe CT is correctly selected, a fast and reliable short circuit protection can be enabled.
The selection of a CT depends not only on the CT specifications but also on thenetwork fault current magnitude, desired protection objectives, and the actual CTburden. The protection settings of the protection relay should be defined in accordancewith the CT performance as well as other factors.
4.1.1.1 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor
The rated accuracy limit factor (Fn) is the ratio of the rated accuracy limit primarycurrent to the rated primary current. For example, a protective current transformer oftype 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10. For protectivecurrent transformers, the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissiblepercentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed forthe accuracy class concerned, followed by the letter "P" (meaning protection).
Table 36: Limits of errors according to IEC 60044-1 for protective current transformers
Accuracy class Current error atrated primarycurrent (%)
Phase displacement at rated primarycurrent
Composite error atrated accuracy limitprimary current (%)minutes centiradians
5P ±1 ±60 ±1.8 5
10P ±3 - - 10
The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrentprotection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if thereare accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, powermetering, and so on) of the protection relay.
The CT accuracy primary limit current describes the highest fault current magnitudeat which the CT fulfils the specified accuracy. Beyond this level, the secondary current
1MRS756498 N Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers
RED615 171Application Manual
![Page 178: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
of the CT is distorted and it might have severe effects on the performance of theprotection relay.
In practise, the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) differs from the rated accuracy limitfactor (Fn) and is proportional to the ratio of the rated CT burden and the actual CTburden.
The actual accuracy limit factor is calculated using the formula:
F FS S
S Sa n
in n
in
≈ ×
+
+
A071141 V1 EN
Fn the accuracy limit factor with the nominal external burden Sn
Sin the internal secondary burden of the CT
S the actual external burden
4.1.1.2 Non-directional overcurrent protection
The current transformer selectionNon-directional overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracyclass or on the actual accuracy limit factor (Fa) of the CTs. It is, however,recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20.
The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal anddynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is notexceeded. This is always fulfilled when
I1n > Ikmax / 100,
Ikmax is the highest fault current.
The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of theprotection relay. For that reason, in practice, even a few times smaller nominalprimary current can be used than given by the formula.
Recommended start current settingsIf Ikmin is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is tooperate, the start current should be set using the formula:
Current start value < 0.7 × (Ikmin / I1n)
I1n is the nominal primary current of the CT.
The factor 0.7 takes into account the protection relay inaccuracy, current transformererrors, and imperfections of the short circuit calculations.
Section 4 1MRS756498 NRequirements for measurement transformers
172 RED615Application Manual
![Page 179: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
The adequate performance of the CT should be checked when the setting of the highset stage overcurrent protection is defined. The operate time delay caused by the CTsaturation is typically small enough when the overcurrent setting is noticeably lowerthan Fa.
When defining the setting values for the low set stages, the saturation of the CT doesnot need to be taken into account and the start current setting is simply according to theformula.
Delay in operation caused by saturation of current transformersThe saturation of CT may cause a delayed protection relay operation. To ensure thetime selectivity, the delay must be taken into account when setting the operate timesof successive protection relays.
With definite time mode of operation, the saturation of CT may cause a delay that isas long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current, when the currentis only slightly higher than the starting current. This depends on the accuracy limitfactor of the CT, on the remanence flux of the core of the CT, and on the operate timesetting.
With inverse time mode of operation, the delay should always be considered as beingas long as the time constant of the DC component.
With inverse time mode of operation and when the high-set stages are not used, the ACcomponent of the fault current should not saturate the CT less than 20 times thestarting current. Otherwise, the inverse operation time can be further prolonged.Therefore, the accuracy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula:
Fa > 20 × Current start value / I1n
The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay.
4.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection
The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection isimplemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection.
1MRS756498 N Section 4Requirements for measurement transformers
RED615 173Application Manual
![Page 180: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
A071142 V1 EN
Figure 251: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection
The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase shortcircuit current is 22.8 kA. The actual accuracy limit factor of the CT is calculated tobe 59.
The start current setting for low-set stage (3I>) is selected to be about twice thenominal current of the cable. The operate time is selected so that it is selective with thenext protection relay (not visible in Figure 251). The settings for the high-set stage andinstantaneous stage are defined also so that grading is ensured with the downstreamprotection. In addition, the start current settings have to be defined so that theprotection relay operates with the minimum fault current and it does not operate withthe maximum load current. The settings for all three stages are as in Figure 251.
For the application point of view, the suitable setting for instantaneous stage (I>>>) inthis example is 3 500 A (5.83 × I2n). I2n is the 1.2 multiple with nominal primarycurrent of the CT. For the CT characteristics point of view, the criteria given by thecurrent transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay settingis considerably below the Fa. In this application, the CT rated burden could have beenselected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons.
Section 4 1MRS756498 NRequirements for measurement transformers
174 RED615Application Manual
![Page 181: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
Section 5 Protection relay's physical connections
5.1 Inputs
5.1.1 Energizing inputs
5.1.1.1 Phase currents
The protection relay can also be used in single or two-phaseapplications by leaving one or two energizing inputs unoccupied.However, at least terminals X120:7-8 must be connected.
Table 37: Phase current inputs included in configurations A, B, C and D
Terminal DescriptionX120:7-8 IL1
X120:9-10 IL2
X120:11-12 IL3
5.1.1.2 Residual current
Table 38: Residual current input included in configurations A, B, C and D
Terminal DescriptionX120:13-14 Io
Table 39: Residual current input included in configuration E
Terminal DescriptionX130:1-2 Io
5.1.1.3 Phase voltages
Table 40: Phase voltage inputs included in configuration D
Terminal DescriptionX130:11-12 U1
X130:13-14 U2
X130:15-16 U3
1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections
RED615 175Application Manual
![Page 182: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
5.1.1.4 Residual voltage
Table 41: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration B
Terminal DescriptionX120:5-6 Uo
Table 42: Additional residual voltage input included in configuration D
Terminal DescriptionX130:17-18 Uo
5.1.1.5 Sensor inputs
Table 43: Combi sensor inputs included in configuration E
Terminal DescriptionX131 IL1
U1
X132 IL2U2
X133 IL3U3
5.1.2 Auxiliary supply voltage input
The auxiliary voltage of the protection relay is connected to terminals X100:1-2. AtDC supply, the positive lead is connected to terminal X100:1. The permitted auxiliaryvoltage range (AC/DC or DC) is marked on the top of the LHMI of the protectionrelay.
Table 44: Auxiliary voltage supply
Terminal DescriptionX100:1 + Input
X100:2 - Input
5.1.3 Binary inputs
The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatchoutput contacts, to trigger the disturbance recorder or for remote control of protectionrelay's settings.
Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections
176 RED615Application Manual
![Page 183: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
Table 45: Binary input terminals X110:1-13 with BIO0005 module
Terminal DescriptionX110:1 BI1, +
X110:2 BI1, -
X110:3 BI2, +
X110:4 BI2, -
X110:5 BI3, +
X110:6 BI3, -
X110:6 BI4, -
X110:7 BI4, +
X110:8 BI5, +
X110:9 BI5, -
X110:9 BI6, -
X110:10 BI6, +
X110:11 BI7, +
X110:12 BI7, -
X110:12 BI8, -
X110:13 BI8, +
Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configurations A, C and D.
Table 46: Binary input terminals X120-1...6
Terminal DescriptionX120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -
X120:5 BI4, +
X120:6 BI4, -
Binary inputs of slot X120 are available with configuration B.
Table 47: Binary input terminals X120:1-4
Terminal DescriptionX120:1 BI1, +
X120:2 BI1, -
X120:3 BI2, +
X120:2 BI2, -
X120:4 BI3, +
X120:2 BI3, -
1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections
RED615 177Application Manual
![Page 184: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
Binary inputs of slot X130 are optional for configurations A, B and C.
Table 48: Binary input terminals X130:1-9
Terminal DescriptionX130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:2 BI2, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI3, +
X130:5 BI3, -
X130:5 BI4, -
X130:6 BI4, +
X130:7 BI5, +
X130:8 BI5, -
X130:8 BI6, -
X130:9 BI6, +
Optional binary inputs of slot X130 are available with configuration D.
Table 49: Optional binary input terminals X130:1-8 with AIM0006
Terminal DescriptionX130:1 BI1, +
X130:2 BI1, -
X130:3 BI2, +
X130:4 BI2, -
X130:5 BI3, +
X130:6 BI3, -
X130:7 BI4, +
X130:8 BI4, -
5.1.4 RTD/mA inputs
It is possible to connect mA and RTD based measurement sensors to the protectionrelay, if the protection relay is provided with optional with AIM0003 module instandard configuration D.
Table 50: Optional RTD/mA inputs with AIM0003 module
Terminal DescriptionX130:1 mA 1 (AI1), +
X130:2 mA 1 (AI1), -
X130:3 RTD1 (AI2), +
X130:4 RTD1 (AI2), -
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections
178 RED615Application Manual
![Page 185: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Terminal DescriptionX130:5 RTD1 (AI2), ground
X130:6 RTD2 (AI3), +
X130:7 RTD2 (AI3), -
X130:8 RTD2 (AI3), ground
5.2 Outputs
5.2.1 Outputs for tripping and controlling
Output contacts PO1, PO2, PO3 and PO4 are heavy-duty trip contacts capable ofcontrolling most circuit breakers. In the factory default configuration, the trip signalsfrom all the protection stages are routed to PO3 and PO4.
Table 51: Output contacts
Terminal DescriptionX100:6 PO1, NO
X100:7 PO1, NO
X100:8 PO2, NO
X100:9 PO2, NO
X100:15 PO3, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:16 PO3, NO
X100:17 PO3, NO
X100:18 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO
X100:19 PO3 (TCS1 input), NO
X100:20 PO4, NO (TCS resistor)
X100:21 PO4, NO
X100:22 PO4, NO
X100:23 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO
X100:24 PO4 (TCS2 input), NO
5.2.2 Outputs for signalling
SO output contacts can be used for signalling on start and tripping of the protectionrelay. On delivery from the factory, the start and alarm signals from all the protectionstages are routed to signalling outputs.
1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections
RED615 179Application Manual
![Page 186: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
Table 52: Output contacts X100:10-14
Terminal DescriptionX100:10 SO1, common
X100:11 SO1, NC
X100:12 SO1, NO
X100:13 SO2, NO
X100:14 SO2, NO
Table 53: Output contacts X110:14-24 with BIO0005
Terminal DescriptionX110:14 SO1, common
X110:15 SO1, NO
X110:16 SO1, NC
X110:17 SO2, common
X110:18 SO2, NO
X110:19 SO2, NC
X110:20 SO3, common
X110:21 SO3, NO
X110:22 SO3, NC
X110:23 SO4, common
X110:24 SO4, NO
Output contacts of slot X130 are available in the optional BIO0006 module withconfigurations A, B and C.
Table 54: Output contacts X130:10-18
Terminal DescriptionX130:10 SO1, common
X130:11 SO1, NO
X130:12 SO1, NC
X130:13 SO2, common
X130:14 SO2, NO
X130:15 SO2, NC
X130:16 SO3, common
X130:17 SO3, NO
X130:18 SO3, NC
Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections
180 RED615Application Manual
![Page 187: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
5.2.3 IRF
The IRF contact functions as an output contact for the self-supervision system of theprotection relay. Under normal operating conditions, the protection relay is energizedand the contact is closed (X100:3-5). When a fault is detected by the self-supervisionsystem or the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the contact X100:3-5 drops off and thecontact X100:3-4 closes.
Table 55: IRF contact
Terminal DescriptionX100:3 IRF, common
X100:4 Closed; IRF, or Uaux disconnected
X100:5 Closed; no IRF, and Uaux connected
5.3 Protection communication options
Two different protection communication options are available for the protectionrelay, that is, a fiber optic link and a galvanic pilot wire link.
Multi-mode or single-mode glass fiber can be used in a fiber optic link. Select therequired glass fiber mode when ordering the protection relay. Link lengths up to 2 kmwith multi-mode fiber and link lengths up to 20 km with single-mode fiber can beachieved. The fiber optic cable used for protection communication is connected to theX16/LD connector in the protection relay. See the technical manual for moreinformation.
If a galvanic pilot wire is used as a protection communication link, the pilot wiremodem RPW600 is required. Select the pilot wire option when ordering the protectionrelay. The protection communication link always requires two modems in a protectionscheme, thus delivered in pairs of master (RPW600M) and follower (RPW600F)units. The protection relay is connected to the pilot wire modem using a single-modefiber optic cable. Thus a single-mode version of protection relay is required if the pilotwire link is used. The fiber optic cable is connected to the X16/LD connector in theprotection relay and in Ethernet FX connector in the pilot wire modem.
Setting or configuration is not needed with either of the pilot wire modem variants orwith the protection relay. Pilot wire link lengths up to 8 km with 0.8 mm2 twisted paircables can be applied. Even higher distances can be achieved with good qualitytwisted pair cables in the pilot wire link. The achieved link length also depends on thenoise levels in the installations.
The pilot wire modem has QoS LEDs in the front panel for easy diagnostics of the pilotwire link quality. The diagnostics feature does not depend on the payload over thepilot wire link and can be used for checking the quality of the intended pilot wire linkeven without installing the protection relays. In addition, a diagnostic kit is availableas an ordering option for more advanced diagnostic and logging of diagnostic
1MRS756498 N Section 5Protection relay's physical connections
RED615 181Application Manual
![Page 188: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
parameters of the pilot wire link. The kit consists of a CD-ROM with the RPW600Diagnostic Tool software with a built-in help, required drivers and a special serialdiagnostic cable to be connected to the console port of the modem.
RED615
MM or SM fiber optic
RED615
Fibre optic link
RED615
SM fibre optic
Galvanic pilot wire twisted-pair
RPW600Mpilot wire modem master
RED615
≥ 3 m
SM fibre optic
≥ 3 m
Galvanic pilot wire link
RPW600Fpilot wire modem
follower
GUID-D4D15565-FD47-425D-8ABE-EA1A3C455673 V1 EN
Figure 252: Protection communication options
See RPW600 user guide for more information.
Section 5 1MRS756498 NProtection relay's physical connections
182 RED615Application Manual
![Page 189: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Section 6 Glossary
100BASE-FX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernetstandard for local area networks (LANs) that uses fiberoptic cabling
100BASE-TX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernetstandard for local area networks (LANs) that usestwisted-pair cabling category 5 or higher with RJ-45connectors
615 series Series of numerical protection and control relays forprotection and supervision applications of utilitysubstations, and industrial switchgear and equipment
AI Analog inputASCII American Standard Code for Information InterchangeBI Binary inputBIO Binary input and outputBO Binary outputCB Circuit breakerCT Current transformerDAN Doubly attached nodeDC 1. Direct current
2. Disconnector3. Double command
DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed byWestronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownershipof the protocol and assumes responsibility for itsevolution.
DPC Double-point controlEMC Electromagnetic compatibilityEthernet A standard for connecting a family of frame-based
computer networking technologies into a LANFIFO First in, first outFTP File transfer protocolFTPS FTP SecureGOOSE Generic Object-Oriented Substation EventGPS Global Positioning System
1MRS756498 N Section 6Glossary
RED615 183Application Manual
![Page 190: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
HMI Human-machine interfaceHSR High-availability seamless redundancyHTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol SecureI/O Input/outputIEC International Electrotechnical CommissionIEC 60870-5-103 1. Communication standard for protective equipment
2. A serial master/slave protocol for point-to-pointcommunication
IEC 61850 International standard for substation communicationand modeling
IEC 61850-8-1 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850standard series
IEC 61850-9-2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850-9-2 offering process businterface
IED Intelligent electronic deviceIEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices'
(IEDs') Cyber Security CapabilitiesIP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by
periods. Each server connected to the Internet isassigned a unique IP address that specifies the locationfor the TCP/IP protocol.
IRIG-B Inter-Range Instrumentation Group's time code formatB
LAN Local area networkLC Connector type for glass fiber cable, IEC 61754-20LCD Liquid crystal displayLE Light EditionLED Light-emitting diodeLHMI Local human-machine interfaceMAC Media access controlMCB Miniature circuit breakerMMS 1. Manufacturing message specification
2. Metering management systemModbus A serial communication protocol developed by the
Modicon company in 1979. Originally used forcommunication in PLCs and RTU devices.
Section 6 1MRS756498 NGlossary
184 RED615Application Manual
![Page 191: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Modbus TCP/IP Modbus RTU protocol which uses TCP/IP and Ethernetto carry data between devices
NC Normally closedNO Normally openPCM600 Protection and Control IED ManagerPO Power outputPRP Parallel redundancy protocolPTP Precision Time ProtocolQoS Quality of serviceRIO600 Remote I/O unitRJ-45 Galvanic connector typeRS-232 Serial interface standardRS-485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocolRTD Resistance temperature detectorRTU Remote terminal unitSAN Single attached nodeSingle-line diagram Simplified notation for representing a three-phase
power system. Instead of representing each of threephases with a separate line or terminal, only oneconductor is represented.
SLD Single-line diagramSMV Sampled measured valuesSNTP Simple Network Time ProtocolSO Signal outputTCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolTCS Trip-circuit supervisionVT Voltage transformerWAN Wide area networkWHMI Web human-machine interface
1MRS756498 N Section 6Glossary
RED615 185Application Manual
![Page 192: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
186
![Page 193: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
187
![Page 194: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
![Page 195: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
![Page 196: Application Manual RED615 Control Line Differential ......A/2008-10-03 1.1 First release B/2009-07-03 2.0 Content updated to correspond to the product version C/2010-06-11 3.0 Content](https://reader035.fdocuments.in/reader035/viewer/2022071112/5fe79c421d9597512408845a/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
ABB Distribution SolutionsDistribution AutomationP.O. Box 699FI-65101 VAASA, FinlandPhone +358 10 22 11
ABB Distribution AutomationManeja WorksVadodara-390013, IndiaPhone +91 265 2604386Fax +91 265 2638922
www.abb.com/mediumvoltagewww.abb.com/relionwww.abb.com/substationautomation
—
© Copyright 2018 ABB. All rights reserved. 1MR
S75
6498
N